Teamcenter 13.

Installing and
Configuring
Simulation Process
Management
PLM00215 - 13.0
 Contents

Introduction to simulation process management

What is Simulation Process Management? ───────────────────── 1-1
Objects you work with ────────────────────────────────── 1-2

Installing Simulation Process Management

Install Simulation Process Management templates ──────────────── 2-1
Update CAE templates for data model changes ────────────────── 2-2
Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches ────────────── 2-2
Install Teamcenter Tool Launcher Client for Active Workspace ──────── 2-12

Configuring Simulation Process Management

About configuring Simulation Process Management ─────────────── 3-1
Define schemas and expose object properties in the GUI ──────────── 3-4
Define schema definitions ─────────────────────────────────── 3-4
Expose object properties in the GUI ───────────────────────────── 3-5
Map product items to model items using a data map ─────────────── 3-5
Map product items to model items ────────────────────────────── 3-5
Tasks to perform before customizing the data map ──────────────────── 3-7
Sample data map file ────────────────────────────────────── 3-8
Use BOM line attributes to define data mapping rules ───────────────── 3-12
Common customization points in the data mapping file ──────────────── 3-13
Create domains to define different data mapping rules ───────────────── 3-13
Create a custom data map from a template ──────────────────────── 3-15
Clone or reference variant information ────────────────────────── 3-16
Configure data map and structure map rules to improve system performance ─── 3-19
Define data mapping rules to map datasets or map project information ─────── 3-24
Best practices to optimize performance while using data mapping and reuse rules
─────────────────────────────────────────────── 3-26
Define data map and structure map preferences ───────────────────── 3-29
Define data map rules to generate model structures containing CAE geometry ── 3-31
Specify comparison options for model and product structures ──────── 3-35
Specify comparison options for the Inspector view ─────────────────── 3-35
Define product structure attributes ───────────────────────────── 3-35
Define simulation structure attributes ─────────────────────────── 3-36
Define root node attributes ───────────────────────────────── 3-36
Configure attribute values for comparing structures ────────────── 3-37
Prerequisites for configuring CAE BOM comparison ─────────────────── 3-37
Configure attribute values for structure comparison ────────────────── 3-38
Configure different types of analysis or CAE packages using standard templates
───────────────────────────────────────────── 3-38
Configure analysis or CAE packages ──────────────────────────── 3-38
Specify a folder for output objects ───────────────────────────── 3-39

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2
© 2020 Siemens
 Contents

Define input and output, and relationship parameters for CAE packages ────── 3-40
Modify style sheets for CAE packages ─────────────────────────── 3-46
Configure rules to derive structures ───────────────────────── 3-47
Define derivative rules and variant configuration rules ───────────────── 3-47
Specify a folder location and naming pattern for derived structures ───────── 3-49
Configure the derivative rule ───────────────────────────────── 3-50
Configure relationship types for model and analysis item revisions ───── 3-57
Configure relationship types ───────────────────────────────── 3-57
Configure highlight colors ────────────────────────────────── 3-58
Capture the exact configuration of product and model structures ────── 3-59
Enable pedigree operations and specify model and analysis relations ──────── 3-59
Configure simulation tools to launch preprocessors, solvers, and postprocessors
───────────────────────────────────────────── 3-59
Configuring simulation tools ───────────────────────────────── 3-59
Prerequisites for simulation tool launch dialog box ─────────────────── 3-60
Define the dataset name to store simulation tool configurations ─────────── 3-61
Set preferences to automatically clear simulation jobs ───────────────── 3-61
Configure the user and shared staging locations for simulation tools ──────── 3-61
Set favorite simulation tools ───────────────────────────────── 3-64
Configure server cache for simulation tools using the PLM XML export method ── 3-65
Define simulation tools ──────────────────────────────────── 3-72
Simulation tool launch script arguments ────────────────────────── 3-98
Configure a simulation tool to extract the KPI values automatically ───────── 3-103
Configure style sheets to allow analysts to launch simulation tools ───────── 3-107
Configure workflow templates for launching simulation tools ──────────── 3-109
Set up Dispatcher to launch simulation tools from different machines ─────── 3-112
Configure the simulation dashboard ──────────────────────── 3-119
Why use the simulation dashboard? ─────────────────────────── 3-119
Configure an analysis or a model dashboard ────────────────────── 3-119
Specify a dashboard name and the object types to monitor ───────────── 3-120
Specify attributes, classification attributes, files, and variant options you want to monitor
────────────────────────────────────────────── 3-121
Create a simulation dashboard and configure the KPI attributes to monitor ──── 3-127
After configuring the dashboard ────────────────────────────── 3-128
Customize the simulation template used to display the dashboard reports ──── 3-129
Map material revisions from the source structure to the target structure 3-130
Map material revisions from the product to the model ──────────────── 3-130
Define a simulation tool for exporting material revisions ─────────────── 3-134
Create a model structure using a workflow process ────────────── 3-136
Configure the workflow process for running structure maps ───────────── 3-136
Configure Dispatcher for the async mode ──────────────────────── 3-136
Configure a workflow process for running structure maps ────────────── 3-137
Configure file upload rules to support analysis on local desktops ───── 3-140
Why configure file upload rules? ────────────────────────────── 3-140
Specify File Explorer options ──────────────────────────────── 3-141
Configure and deploy file upload rules ────────────────────────── 3-141
Create a file upload rule for folders ──────────────────────────── 3-146
Configure properties in dialog boxes ─────────────────────── 3-148

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure properties in dialog boxes ─────────────────────────── 3-148
Configure properties in the Multi-Replace Item Revision dialog box ───────── 3-148
Run scripts to quickly set up sample configurations ────────────── 3-150
Set up sample configurations ─────────────────────────────── 3-150
How is the CAE sample data packaged? ───────────────────────── 3-152
Import the sample CAE data ──────────────────────────────── 3-153
Quick start for configuring Simcenter HEEDS ────────────────── 3-154
Process flow for HEEDS analysis ────────────────────────────── 3-154
Create or modify a HEEDS project ───────────────────────────── 3-155
Extract the information required for the analysis and perform the HEEDS analysis 3-157
Configure for Active Workspace ─────────────────────────── 3-160
Configure the Simulation-related objects table ───────────────────── 3-160
Edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the Simulation tab ────── 3-163

Running CAE utilities

4 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 1. Introduction to simulation process
management
What is Simulation Process Management?
Simulation Process Management is a computer-aided engineering (CAE) data management solution
using which you can validate or improve a design in the early stages of the product lifecycle. Design is
an iterative process, and often designs need to be modified due to manufacturing constraints or
conflicting requirements. Arriving at a good design in the initial stages of product development and
continuously validating the design is important to minimize the time spent on verification and testing.

The workflow for managing the simulation process is as follows:

Understanding Simulation Process Management using an example

1. View the analysis request

Let us assume that you (as a simulation analyst) are an expert in simulated automobile crash
testing. The analysis request is to perform a simulated side-impact test for a design change made
to the driver-side door.

2. Prepare or refine the design data for analysis

Your first task is to import the product geometry and simplify it to make it relevant for the analysis.
The driver-side door has a speaker; switches for the door lock; power window; and electric mirror;
an intrusion beam; steel frames; door panels; and other parts. The speaker and switches are not
relevant for the simulated side-impact analysis. You import the complete product geometry and
use a simplification tool to remove the speaker and switches. Then, you create geometry revisions

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 1-1
© 2020 Siemens
 1. Introduction to simulation process management

for the intrusion beam, steel frame, and door panel, and save the simplified geometry for each
component.

3. Create models
The model you want to analyze includes the mesh definition, connections, and material and
physical properties. In this step, you create model revisions—in the context of the geometry
revisions—for the intrusion beam, steel frame, and door panel. Then, you select the appropriate
meshing tool to generate meshes for each component.

4. Create the analysis and solve the analysis

The analysis you want to perform includes load cases, solver parameters, and boundary conditions.
In this step, you create analysis revisions—in the context of the model revisions—for the intrusion
beam, steel frame, and door panel. Then, you select the appropriate solver tool to specify load
cases and solver parameters.
In this example, you create different analyses to vary the load cases, for example, a 3000 pound
SUV-like barrier hits the driver side door at 30 mph. You also create another analysis model to
change the barrier weight to 3200 pounds and the speed to 35 mph.

5. Evaluate the results and send recommendations

The intrusion beam acts as an energy-absorbing material during a side impact. The results show
that the intrusion beam cannot withstand forces of 3200 pounds at 35 mph. After evaluating
results from various scenarios, you sign off the workflow by suggesting a design change for the
intrusion beam.

Objects you work with

• Geometry revisions
The CAD model is used to define the geometry of a part or an assembly. During the final stages of the
design process, the geometry contains numerous details, such as sharp edges, bolt holes, or fillets,
which are not required for the analysis. The geometry used for simulation analysis is often different
from the product geometry. It may be a simplified or an abstracted version or an approximation when
the product geometry is not available. CAE Geometry revisions are workspace objects for storing the
simplified geometry. Geometry revisions are created in the context of the item revisions in the
product structure.

• Model revisions
A mesh represents a geometric object as a set of finite elements. Finite element analysis (FEA) is a
computerized method for simulating how a part reacts to conditions such as force, heat, vibration,
and other physical effects in the real world. CAE Model revisions are workspace objects for storing
the mesh definition, connections, and material and physical properties. Model revisions are created in
the context of geometry revisions.

• Analysis revisions
An analysis revision represents the specific simulation you want to perform. CAE Analysis revisions
are workspace objects for including load cases, solver parameters, and boundary conditions. Analysis
revisions are created in the context of model revisions.

1-2 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Objects you work with

• Result revisions
A result revision represents the results of a simulation analysis. CAE Result revisions are workspace
objects for storing the results of a solve. They may contain JT files or other visualization files that are
the results of a solve. Result revisions are associated with analysis revisions.

You can create the following CAE revisions in the context of other revisions along with relationships:

Context CAE revisions you can Default relationships

revision create for the context
revision

Product CAE Geometry TC_CAE_SOURCE and

structure TC_CAE_TARGET
CAE Model

CAE Analysis

CAE Geometry CAE Model TC_CAE_SOURCE

CAE Analysis

CAE Model CAE Analysis TC_CAE_DEFINING

CAE Analysis CAE Analysis TC_CAE_INCLUDE

CAE Result TC_CAE_RESULTS

The following is an example of the default simulation data model.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 1-3
© 2020 Siemens
 1. Introduction to simulation process management

1-4 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process
Management
Install Simulation Process Management templates
1. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) on Linux server or Windows server.

2. Select the appropriate options until you reach the Features panel.

Note:
The configuration installed is dependent on the options that you choose in the Solutions
panel of the TEM installation windows, such as Corporate Server, Rich Client 2–Tier, and
Business Modeler IDE. You can also add any of the options available in the Solutions panel
from the Features panel.

3. If you want to configure your system using the Business Modeler IDE:

a. Click Next. Select appropriate options until you reach the Business Modeler IDE Templates
panel.

b. In the Business Modeler IDE Templates panel, select the following templates.

Template Description

Base Install→Teamcenter Installs the Teamcenter Foundation template.

Foundation

Extensions→CAE Simulation Installs the Simulation Process Management templates.

Management→Simulation
Process Management

Extensions→CAE Simulation Installs enhancements to improve the default data model

Management→Extended with additional attributes.
Simulation Process
Management

You can install Business Modeler IDE as a stand-alone application, or if you already have
Eclipse installed, install it into your Eclipse environment.

4. Click Next.
Select appropriate options for Linux server or Windows server until you complete the installation.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-1
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

Update CAE templates for data model changes

Templates are the files that hold the data model changes. You must install the Simulation Process
Management template or update the CAE templates.

1. Copy the following XML files from the patch kit.

• feature_CAE.xml

• feature_foundation.xml

2. Start TEM, select the Configuration Manager option, and click Next.

3. Select the Perform maintenance on an existing configuration option, and click Next.

4. Select the configuration for which you have installed Simulation Process Management, and click
Next.

5. Select the Update Database (Full Model - System downtime required) option, and click Next.
TEM displays all the templates you have currently installed.

6. Click the Browse button and change to the patch_kit\platform\install directory to which you
copied the XML files.

7. Confirm your selection to update the database.

8. To confirm whether the cache is cleared, run the following commands from the Teamcenter
command prompt:

• generate_metadata_cache -u=infodba -p=infodba -g=dba generate all

• generate_client_meta_cache -u=infodba -p=infodba -g=dba generate all

Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches

• Run the cae_configure_dm_propertyset utility if you makes changes to the data map file or the
configuration file
• Convert the legacy CAE Package configuration to the new configuration
• Migrate simulation tools after upgrading Teamcenter
• Migrate extended properties

After installing Teamcenter patches on the Linux server or Windows server, perform the following tasks:

2-2 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches

Run the cae_configure_dm_propertyset utility if you makes changes to the data map file
or the configuration file

Run the cae_configure_dm_propertyset utility each time you make changes to the
NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration file or the data map file. This utility reads the NodeXMLConfig.xml
file and creates a custom property set that is used for data mapping.

Example:

cae_configure_dm_propertyset -u=infodba -p=password -g=dba -

log=name_of_log_file_containing_utility_results

Convert the legacy CAE Package configuration to the new configuration

Run the cae_convert_package_configuration utility to convert the legacy CAE Package configuration
created during or before Teamcenter 11.4 to the new configuration. If you have run this utility in the
previous release, do not run it again.

Example:

cae_convert_package_configuration -u=infodba -p=password -g=dba

Migrate simulation tools after upgrading Teamcenter

Prior to Teamcenter 10.1.3, configured simulation tools were managed in the database in an XML file.
From 10.1.3, simulation tools are managed in the database as individual business objects, and,
therefore, you must migrate simulation tools when you to upgrade to Teamcenter 10.1.3 and beyond.

After Teamcenter is migrated to a new version, you must run the cae_migrate_tool_configuration
utility to migrate existing simulation tools.

Example:

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -pf=password_file -g=dba -

ou=owning_user_id -og=owning_group_name

Note:
If you specify the -ou argument and do not specify the -og argument, the user’s default group is
used.

Migrate extended properties

The following is an example of how to migrate extended properties from a custom form attached to a
CAE Model revision to the same revision. Users may use a custom form to include extended properties
such as material properties, inertia, center of gravity (CoG), and mesh type and attach them to a model

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-3
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

revision. You can extend these properties to the model revision by migrating these properties and
making the duplicate properties obsolete from the custom form in the database.

1. Install the Extended Simulation Process Management template using TEM.

This template installs enhancements to improve the default data model with additional attributes.

2. Create a mapping file (text file) to map the properties you want to extend to the CAE Model
revision.

In this example, cae0CoGx is an extended property in a custom form, and the system migrates it to
the sim0CoGx property in the database. Similarly, you can map other extended properties.

Example of using extended properties in a mapping file with a single section:

# This is a valid file with one section

# This is the basic scenario when attributes from single source BO/Form
needs to be
# migrated to single target BO
#
# target_object_type, relation_type, source_form_type,
source_form_attribute
# and target_attribute are valid strings if they contain following
characters ONLY
# - a to z (Both capital and small case)
# - numbers
# - underscore ['_'] character
# - space [‘ ’] character

# @target_object_type:relation_type:source_form_type
@CAEModelRevision:IMAN_master_form:CAEModelRevisionMaster
#source_attribute,target_attribute
solver_name,solver_name
analysis_types,analysis_types
cae0CoGx,sim0CoGx
cae0CoGy,sim0CoGy
cae0Ip3,sim0Ip3
cae0Ixy,sim0Ixy

Example of using extended properties in a mapping file with multiple sections:

# This is a valid example file with more than one sections

# This is a scenario when attributes from more than one source BO/Form
# needs to be migrated to one or more target BO.

# target_object_type:relation_type:source_form_type
@CAEModelRevision:IMAN_specification:CAE0EngProperties
# source_form_attribute,target_attribute

2-4 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches

cae0CoGx,sim0CoGx
cae0Disciplines,sim0Disciplines
cae0Ip1,sim0Ip1
cae0Ip2,sim0Ip2
cae0Ixx,sim0Ixx
cae0Iyz,sim0Iyz
cae0Izz,sim0Izz
# there must be at least one blank line to separate two different sections.

#@target_object:relation_name:source_object
@CAEModelRevision:IMAN_master_form:CAEModelRevisionMaster
#source_attribute,target_attribute
solver_name,solver_name
analysis_types,analysis_types

Caution:
If you use the same target object in multiple sections in the attribute mapping file, it may
cause a failure in the migration of some objects. A log file is created and you can view it to
see both successful and unsuccessful instances of the migration of extended properties.

3. Run the cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties utility by including the mapping file you

created.

When you run this utility, it copies the properties from the custom form to the CAE Model revision.

4. Using BMIDE, mark the duplicate custom properties in the database as obsolete.

5. Edit the datamapping.xml file.

You can add the extended properties to the datamapping.xml file so that these properties are
available when a simulation analyst:

• Creates model revisions using structure maps and data map rules; and

• Derives one or more model structures from an existing model structure.

a. Locate the datamapping.xml file and open it.

The datamapping.xml sample file is located in the TC_DATA directory. However, the file used
at runtime is managed in a CAEStructureMap dataset attached to the item revision indicated
by the CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

The following is an example of the file before adding custom properties:

<!-- *************************************************************
********* CAE Model Revision attributes *************

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-5
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

The input CAE Model revision attributes that need to populate

the output's CAE Model revision atrributes go here.
*************************************************************-->
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<!-- Input's Description transferred to output's attribute of same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_desc&apos;]/
@VALUE" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<!-- Input's Name transferred to output's attribute of same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_name&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

b. Add the custom properties.

Example of the same file after adding custom properties.

<!-- *************************************************************
********* CAE Model Revision attributes *************

The input CAE Model revision attributes that need to populate

the output's CAE Model revision atrributes go here.
*************************************************************-->
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<!-- Input's Description transferred to output's attribute of same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_desc&apos;]/@VALUE" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<!-- Input's Name transferred to output's attribute of same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_name&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>

2-6 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0RepresentationType">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0RepresentationType&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MasterFormat">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0MasterFormat&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Materials">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Materials&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Thicknesses">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Thicknesses&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshFlags">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0MeshFlags&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0PIDFormula">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0PIDFormula&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0PIDList">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0PIDList&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MIDs">

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-7
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0MIDs&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshDensity">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0MeshDensity&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshQuality">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0MeshQuality&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshQualityCheck">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0MeshQualityCheck&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Mass">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Mass&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0CoGx">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0CoGx&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0CoGy">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0CoGy&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0CoGz">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0CoGz&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>

2-8 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches

</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ixx">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Ixx&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ixy">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Ixy&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ixz">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Ixz&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Iyy">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Iyy&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Iyz">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Iyz&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Izz">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Izz&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ip1">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Ip1&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ip2">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Ip2&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-9
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ip3">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;sim0Ip3&apos;]/@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>

</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

c. Save the datamapping.xml file and upload it to the CAEStructureMap dataset attached to
the item revision indicated by the CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

6. Edit the NodeXMLConfig.xml file.

You can add the extended properties to the NodeXMLConfig.xml file so that these properties are
available when a simulation analyst:

• Creates model revisions using structure maps and data map rules; and

• Derives one or more model structures from an existing model structure.

a. Locate the NodeXMLConfig.xml file and open it.

The NodeXMLConfig.xml sample file is located in the TC_DATA directory. However, the file
used at runtime is managed in a CAEStructureMap dataset attached to the item revision
indicated by the CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

The following is an example of the file before adding custom properties:

<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEModelRevision" TYPE="CAEModelRevision">

<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name"
NAME="Name" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc"
NAME="Description" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id"
NAME="ID" TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="structure_revisions"
NAME="BOM View Revisions" TYPE="Reference"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="ps_children"
TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids"
NAME="Project IDs" TYPE="Runtime"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

b. Add the custom properties.

2-10 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Tasks to perform after installing Teamcenter patches

Example of the same file after adding custom properties.

<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEModelRevision" TYPE="CAEModelRevision">

<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name"
NAME="Name" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc"
NAME="Description" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id"
NAME="ID" TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="structure_revisions"
NAME="BOM View Revisions" TYPE="Reference"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="ps_children" TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids"
NAME="Project IDs" TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0RepresentationType"
NAME="Representation Type" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MasterFormat"
NAME="Master Format" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Materials"
NAME="Materials" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Thicknesses"
NAME="Thicknesses" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshFlags"
NAME="Mesh Flags" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0PIDFormula"
NAME="PID Formula" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0PIDList"
NAME="PID List" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MIDs"
NAME="MIDs" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshDensity"
NAME="Mesh Density" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshQuality"
NAME="Mesh Quality" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0MeshQualityCheck"
NAME="Mesh Quality Check" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Mass"
NAME="Mass" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0CoGx"
NAME="CoGx" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0CoGy"
NAME="CoGy" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0CoGz"
NAME="CoGz" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ixx"
NAME="Ixx" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ixy"
NAME="Ixy" TYPE="Attribute"/>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-11
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ixz"
NAME="Ixz" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Iyy"
NAME="Iyy" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Iyz"
NAME="Iyz" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Izz"
NAME="Izz" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ip1"
NAME="Ip1" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ip2"
NAME="Ip2" TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="sim0Ip3"
NAME="Ip3" TYPE="Attribute"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

c. Save the NodeXMLConfig.xml file and upload it to the CAEStructureMap dataset attached
to the item revision indicated by the CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

Install Teamcenter Tool Launcher Client for Active Workspace

• Why install TTLC?

• Install TTLC using quick setup shell script (Linux)

• Install TTLC using quick setup bat file (Windows)

• Verify the port number and server session time out properties after installing TTLC

Why install TTLC?

In Active Workspace Simulation Process Management, the simulation analyst creates geometry, model,
and analysis revisions and launches a preconfigured simulation tool. The tool uploads the simplified
geometry, meshing data, or analysis data to the respective application, runs the application, and then
uploads the resulting data to the corresponding revision created by the analyst. To run simulation tools
or open external links, you must install Teamcenter Tool Launcher Client (TTLC) on the client machine.

The simulation analyst can launch simulation tools on Active Workspace clients using TTLC only if the
simulation administrator has configured simulation tools using the Local Launch option. TTLC is not
required for launch methods such as Remote Launch and Server Launch.

TTLC supports single sign-on (SSO) access to SSO-enabled Teamcenter applications. This eliminates the
need for users to log on to each Teamcenter application separately. For more information on installing
Security Services, see Security Services Installation/Customization in the Teamcenter collection.

2-12 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Install Teamcenter Tool Launcher Client for Active Workspace

Install TTLC using quick setup shell script (Linux)

1. Set JAVA_HOME.

2. Copy the contents of the additional_applications/TTLC_installer directory from the installation kit
to a local machine in a directory where you want to install Tool Launcher Client, for example,
workdir/TTLC_installer.

3. From a command line, change to the directory where you have copied the Tool Launcher Client
installer.

4. To set up the Tool Launcher Client environment, run the following command:

ttlc_quick_setup.sh

5. To access sample usage help provided by this script, run the following command.

ttlc_quick_setup.sh -h

6. To verify the TTLC version number, run the following command after installing TTLC:

ttlc_quick_setup.sh -version

7. Verify the port number and server session time out properties after installing TTLC.

Install TTLC using quick setup bat file (Windows)

1. Set JAVA_HOME.

2. Copy the contents of the additional_applications\TTLC_installer folder from the installation kit
and paste it to a local machine in a folder where you want to install Tool Launcher Client, for
example, D:\workdir\TTLC\11.4.0.1\TTLC_installer.

3. Open a command prompt with administrative privileges and browse to the folder where you want
to install Tool Launcher Client, for example, D:\workdir\TTLC\11.4.0.1\TTLC_installer.

4. To set up the Tool Launcher Client environment, run the following command:

ttlc_quick_setup.bat

5. To access sample usage help provided by this script, type ttlc_quick_setup.bat -h in the command
prompt.

6. To verify the TTLC version number, run the following command after installing TTLC:

ttlc_quick_setup.bat -version

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 2-13
© 2020 Siemens
 2. Installing Simulation Process Management

7. Verify the port number and server session time out properties after installing TTLC.

Verify the port number and server session time out properties after installing TTLC

1. Open the TTLC_config.properties file from the location where you have installed the Tool
Launcher Client.

2. Verify the port number for the TTLC_port property value. The default value is 9876.

The TTLC client socket connects to the TTLC server socket on this port. For more information, see
the TTLC_config.properties file.

This is the TTLC server socket number and not the Teamcenter server port number.

To find out if this port number is being used, type netstat -ano | findstr 9876 (Windows example)
from a command prompt. If you want to change the port number, edit this property value. Be sure
to change it before you start any simulation tools.

3. Verify the TTLC_server_session_timeout property value. The default idle time is 60 minutes.

The TTLC server socket log outs from the Teamcenter server and stops the TTLC server socket after
the specified idle time.

For more information, see the TTLC_config.properties file.

2-14 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process
Management
About configuring Simulation Process Management

Role Task Description

Simulation Configures data Define data map rules to automate the creation of model
administrator map rules structures.
In CAE Manager, analysts can generate a CAE model
structure from an existing product structure. The data map
determines the default mapping of product items to CAE
model items.
Data map execution is driven by the contents of two XML
files: a data map file (datamapping.xml) and a
configuration file (NodeXMLConfig.xml). The rules
describing the mappings are contained in the data map file.
The simulation analyst uses data map rules to create a
model structure that is an exact replica of the product
structure.

Lead simulation Creates structure Define structure map rules to automate the creation of
analyst or a map rules model structures.
designated
The lead simulation analyst can create filter rules to include,
simulation analyst
exclude, reuse, skip, move, or remove components in a
structure.
The simulation analysts use structure map rules to create
model structures for specific types of analyses.
For more information about creating structure map rules,
see Using Simulation Process Management on Rich Client.

A user with DBA Configures rules Define derivative rules and variant configuration rules.
privileges; OR a to derive
Analysts can use these predefined rules to quickly derive one
group structures at the
or more simulation variants from an existing one.
administrator; OR site, group, or
a simulation user level
analyst

Simulation Maps material Create rules to allow the model structure to be exported
administrator revisions from with the material IDs and the associated material details.
the product
When an analyst creates a model structure using data map
structure to the
and structure map rules, the material IDs and associated
model structure
material details are captured in two XML files. The analyst
can apply a style sheet and transform the PLM XML format to

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-1
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Role Task Description

MatML (an extensible markup language or XML developed

for the interchange of material information) or any
preprocessor or solver-specific format.

Simulation Configures the Configure a workflow process to allow simulation analysts to

administrator workflow process create model structures by using structure map rules.
for running
For this, you must configure the Dispatcher AsyncService to
structure maps
activate the translator and to process asynchronous requests
from Teamcenter. You must also create a workflow process
by specifying the structure map item ID to allow simulation
analysts to launch the workflow process by running
structure maps rules to create model structures.

Simulation Specifies Define product structure attributes, simulation structure

administrator comparison attributes, and root node attributes for comparing
options for structures.
comparing a CAE
Simulation analysts can use these comparison options to
model structure
compare a CAE model structure against a product structure
against a product
in the Inspector view.
structure

Simulation Configures Define attribute values for comparing structures.

administrator attribute values
Simulation analysts can use these comparison options to
for structure
investigate differences in attributes such as thickness,
comparison
associated files or load cases, and file content.

Simulation Configures Configure rules to allow simulation analysts to launch

administrator or a simulation tools simulation tools that can include preprocessors, solvers, and
user with DBA postprocessors.
privileges
Simulation tools can be configured to define and organize
specific tools to gather process inputs and solver output.

Simulation Configures The simulation administrator can set up sample

administrator simulation tools configurations by running the tcsim_quick_setup.pl script.
to extract the key The sample simulation tool configurations includes the
performance Extract KPI from Result tool.
indicator (KPI)
This is the default tool for extracting KPI values such as
values
maximum stress, minimum temperature, or maximum
automatically
displacement automatically.

Simulation Sets up Set up Dispatcher on different machines or modules that

administrator Dispatcher to have simulation tools. Simulation analysts can launch
launch simulation simulation tools on the required modules.
tools from
different
machines

3-2 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 About configuring Simulation Process Management

Role Task Description

Simulation Enables Enable the SimProcess and NxNastran services on

administrator SimProcess and Dispatcher to launch a simulation process or NX Nastran
NxNastran remotely.
services on
Dispatcher

A user with DBA Configures CAE packages are standardized and approved package
privileges; OR a analysis or CAE definitions used by simulation analysts across the enterprise
simulation packages at the to create a set of CAE item revisions for a specific analysis.
administrator; OR site, group, or
a group user level
administrator; OR
a simulation
analyst

Simulation Enables pedigree Enable pedigree operations and specify valid relation types
administrator operations for model relations and analysis relations.
Pedigree information captures the exact configuration of
various structures, including the revision rule, effectivity,
and variant rules, and persists that information in the
database. For simulation analysts, this information is critical
to understand what was analyzed at a later time and to have
clear traceability of what was analyzed.

Simulation Configures file Define file upload rules for simulation analysts to upload or
administrator upload rules to download the analysis files to or from Teamcenter.
support analysis
At some sites, not all simulation tools are integrated with
on local desktops
Teamcenter. Simulation analysts may prefer to run the
simulation tools on their local desktops and periodically
upload and download the data to or from Teamcenter as
needed.

Simulation Configures the Configure analysis or model dashboards.

administrator simulation
The simulation dashboard provides a clear view of the status
dashboard
of all the models and analyses carried out by simulation
analysts at the program, milestone, group, or individual user
level. It allows decision makers to access the latest
information and make correct decisions.

Simulation Runs scripts to After installing the Simulation Process Management

administrator quickly set up template on a virtual machine or a sandbox environment,
sample you can run scripts to quickly set up sample configurations.
configurations This provides an easy setup for presales or customers who
want to explore the Simulation Process Management
capabilities.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-3
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Role Task Description

Simulation Installs To run simulation tools or open external links in Active

administrator Teamcenter Tool Workspace Simulation Process Management, you must
Launcher Client install Teamcenter Tool Launcher Client (TTLC) on each client
for Active machine.
Workspace

A user with DBA Edits style sheets Edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the
privileges to expose custom context of the product, geometry, model, analysis, or the
revision types in result revision. Also, configure traversal paths to define how
the Simulation to traverse the data structure and specify which
tab for Active relationships are of interest and what should be done when
Workspace these relationships are found.

Define schemas and expose object properties in the GUI

Define schema definitions

You can configure and manage the CAE schema and attributes in Business Modeler IDE.

The following schema definitions and attributes are defined in Teamcenter to manage CAE data.

Form storage classes:

CAEMasterStore CAERevMasterStore

CAEAnalysisMasterStore CAEAnalysisRevMasterStore

CAEGeometryMasterStore CAEGeometryRevMasterStore

CAEModelMasterStore CAEModelRevMasterStore

CAEResultMasterStore CAEResultRevMasterStore

StructureMapMasterStore StructureMapRevMasterStore

CAESolverManagerStore

Item classes and item revision classes:

CAEItem CAEItemRevision

CAE Analysis CAE Analysis Revision

CAE Geometry CAE Geometry Revision

CAE Model CAE Model Revision

3-4 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose object properties in the GUI

CAEItem CAEItemRevision

CAE Result CAE Result Revision

CAE Structure Map CAE Structure Map Revision

CAEAnalysisMasterStore, CAEAnalysisRevMasterStore, CAE Analysis item class, and CAE Analysis

Revision item revision class are enhanced and customized for CAE Manager.

Expose object properties in the GUI

The Business Modeler IDE (Integrated Development Environment) is a tool for configuring and extending
the data model of your Teamcenter installation. In Business Modeler IDE, you can use the Operation
Descriptor tab on business objects to make properties visible and required on creation dialog boxes in
the rich client. These properties are exposed when these objects are created in the rich client.

Simulation Process Management provides a specialized wizard, the New CAE Item wizard, for creating
items and item revisions that are subtypes of the CAE item. This wizard exposes properties of these item
subtypes that are declared in the Operation Descriptor tab in Business Modeler IDE. The wizard
provides steps for establishing certain references to other item revisions by leveraging CAE relationship
types. When you invoke this wizard from CAE Manager, the wizard presents logical defaults for these
references based on the item revisions you select or load in CAE Manager.

Note:
The administrator can alter subtypes of the CAE item using the Operation Descriptor tab and the
analyst can subsequently launch the New CAE Item wizard to enter item properties and subtype
properties. However, if the administrator creates subtypes of the CAE item directly, the wizard
does not support creation of the subtypes that are created directly.

Map product items to model items using a data map

Map product items to model items

In CAE Manager, analysts can generate a CAE structure from an existing product structure. The data map
determines the default mapping of product items to CAE model items before any structure map is
applied.

Using the sample data map file, a CAE Model item is created for each generic item in the product
structure. In practice, your company will have defined one or more custom item types to handle product
structure data as part of its business model. For each custom product item type in your company's
business model, you (as administrator) need to create a mapping rule that determines the
corresponding CAE item type in the CAE structure. Generally, you need to do this only once, unless your
company's business model changes.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-5
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

You can create domains to define different rules, for example, your company might have different CAE
disciplines for safety, durability, and so on. The company wants data mapping to be different for each
discipline, but there is only one data map XML file for the whole site. In such situations, you can create
and define domains.

Data map execution is driven by the contents of two XML files—a data map file (datamapping.xml) and
a configuration file (NodeXMLConfig.xml). The rules describing the mappings are contained in the data
map file. These rules determine:

• The CAE items and item revisions that are created when you generate a CAE structure from a product
structure.

• The relations between product item revisions and CAE item revisions.

• The naming of the resulting CAE items and item revisions.

• The mapping of all attached datasets of a particular type to input item revisions having a specific
relationship to be referenced or copied to the output structure with the same relationship or a
different relationship type.

To manage data map definition files:

• Run the cae_manage_datamap_definition utility to update the data map and the NodeXML
configuration file in the data map set.

• The CAE_datamap_files_location preference is used to manage the location of the data map
definition files.
The preference indicating the item revision containing this information is a site preference. Only a
user with DBA privileges can set it.

• Any type of item revision can be used to manage these files.

The item revision is owned by the user who is responsible for defining this information in the
customer’s environment. Often, this is a user with the simulation administrator role.

• A CAEStructureMap dataset must be attached to the item revision using a Specifications

relationship.
This dataset:

• Must contain at least one XML reference, which is the datamapping.xml file.

• May contain a second XML reference, which is the NodeXMLConfig.xml file.

The simulation administrator can edit the sample NodeXMLConfig.xml file to control the items, item
revisions, forms, or BOM line attributes that are processed. The administrator can edit the required
attributes in the XML file in such a way that Teamcenter processes only the required attributes. This
significantly improves the performance and memory usage of data map and structure map execution
operations.

3-6 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Tasks to perform before customizing the data map

Tasks to perform before customizing the data map

Data map namespaces and schemas

The data map file is an XML file that resides in the TC_DATA directory. It uses elements from three
different namespaces:

• xmlns:smr - Declares the SMERule schema definition. The elements in this schema define the data
mapping rules and the XSL templates to apply. The SMERule schema definition is named
tcsim_sm_rule.xsd, and is located in the TC_DATA directory. The schema definition file is fully
documented.

• xmlns:smn - Declares the SMENodes schema definition. The elements in this schema are used to
read and write information about nodes in a structure, such as item class, type, relations, name, and
description. The SMENodes schema definition is named tcsim_sm_node.xsd, and is located in the
TC_DATA directory. The schema definition file is fully documented.

• xmlns:xsl is the XSL Transformations (XSLT 1.0) language as defined by the World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C). Elements in this namespace are used to define conditional statements and the
XSL templates to apply to nodes that meet the defined conditions.

<smr:RULES
xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:smn="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMENode"
xmlns:smr="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMERule"
xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMERule
tcsim_sm_rule.xsd">
</smr:RULES>

Before customizing the data map

• To prepare for customizing the data map, have the following information ready:

• The name of each custom item type and item revision type your company uses to manage CAD
data.

• The number of different product item types you need to support.

• The default naming scheme to apply to CAE items created by the data map.

• Relationships and attributes that you want to map before executing data map rules.
A relationship is required to copy or reference a dataset. You can define this relationship as a simple
property on the source object, that is, the CAE Model item revision.
You must turn on Operation Descriptors for the attributes and relationships of any objects that
you want to map before executing data map rules against those objects.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-7
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

The Business Modeler IDE (Integrated Development Environment) is a tool for configuring and
extending the data model of your Teamcenter installation. In Business Modeler IDE, you can use
the Operation Descriptor tab on business objects to make properties visible and required on
creation dialog boxes in the rich client. These properties are exposed when these objects are
created in the rich client.

• A compound property is a property that is displayed on one object (the display object) although it is
defined and resides on a different object (the source object). The display object and source object
are related by one or more Teamcenter relations and reference properties. If you have a custom
form attached to an item revision with a custom relationship, and the output is a CAE Model item
revision, then you must add the custom relation as a compound property to the output.
Example: If xyz custom form is attached to the CAE Model item revision with abc custom
relationship, you must use the Operation Descriptor tab on business objects in Business Modeler
IDE to add the abc custom relationship as a compound property to the CAE Model item revision.

• Before data mapping objects in Business Modeler IDE, apply schema changes, install templates, and
update the database using TEM.
Changed business objects and properties are considered as schema changes. You can use Business
Modeler IDE to extend Teamcenter with your own business objects, properties, and business behavior.
To do so, store extensions using a template and then deploy this template.

• Identity all attributes of any objects that you want to map in the NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration
file for each domain. The FOCUS="IN" attribute identifies objects types that are the source objects and
FOCUS="OUT" attribute identifies object types that are the target objects. You must set the
STATUS="ACTIVE" attributes for all objects for custom queries to pull in the attributes.

• Run the cae_configure_dm_propertyset utility each time you make changes to the
NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration file.
This utility reads the NodeXMLConfig.xml file and creates custom property sets that are used for
data mapping.
Example:
cae_configure_dm_propertyset [-u=infodba -p=infodba -g=dba]

Note:
After editing the datamapping.xml file, you must save the file with UTF-8 encoding if the
attributes have special characters in it.

Sample data map file

Teamcenter provides a sample data map file that you can use as a template for developing your own
data maps. The sample data map file, datamapping.xml, is located in the TC_DATA directory.

This data map file reflects the commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) functionality of CAE Manager in
Teamcenter. You can use this file as a template when defining a data map that supports your business
model.

3-8 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Sample data map file

The sample data map file applies a rule to a selected product structure that traverses the nodes in the
product structure and performs the following actions:

• If the current node is an item of the type Item, the data map creates a corresponding CAE Model item
in the CAE structure, with a CAE Target Relationship relation to the product item.

• If the current node contains an item revision of the type ItemRevision, the data map creates a
corresponding CAEModelRevision item revision.

• If the current node represents a product structure occurrence (PSOccurrence), the data map creates a
corresponding occurrence in the CAE structure.

• In each case, the data map extracts the name and description of the node from the product structure
and assigns it to the corresponding node in the CAE structure.

<smr:RULES
xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:smn="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMENode"
xmlns:smr="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMERule"
xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMERule tcsim_sm_rule.xsd">
<smr:RULE
TYPE="MAPPING"
DOMAIN="CAE"
NAME="Item Mapping"
DESCRIPTION="">
<xsl:if
test="smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;Item&apos; and @TYPE=&apos;Item&apos;]">
<xsl:call-template
name="Item">
<xsl:with-param
name="node"
select="."/>
<xsl:with-param
name="ruleName"
select="&apos;Item Mapping&apos;"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>
</smr:RULE>
<xsl:template
name="Item">
<xsl:param
name="node"/>
<xsl:param
name="ruleName"/>
<xsl:variable
name="currentnodeline"
select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;Item&apos; and @TYPE=&apos;Item&apos;]">
</xsl:variable>
<smn:NODES>
<smn:CONTEXT
FOCUS="OUT">
<smn:RULE_EXECUTED>
<xsl:attribute

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-9
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="$ruleName"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:RULE_EXECUTED>
</smn:CONTEXT>
<smn:NODE>
<smn:BOMVIEW
TYPE="view"/>
<smn:NODE_RELATIONS>
<smn:NODE_RELATION
RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="CAE Target Relationship">
<smn:PRIMARY_NODE
CLASS="ItemRevision"
TYPE="CAEModelRevision"
FOCUS="OUT"/>
<smn:SECONDARY_NODE
CLASS="ItemRevision"
TYPE="ItemRevision"
FOCUS="IN"/>
</smn:NODE_RELATION>
</smn:NODE_RELATIONS>
<smn:NODE_LINE
CLASS="Item"
TYPE="CAE Model"
STATE="MAPPING">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE
NAME="Name">
<xsl:attribute
name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="$currentnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@NAME=&apos;Name&apos;]/@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE
NAME="Description">
<xsl:attribute
name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="$currentnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@NAME=&apos;Description&apos;]/@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<xsl:if
test="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;ItemRevision&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;ItemRevision&apos;]">
<xsl:call-template
name="ItemRevision">
<xsl:with-param
name="node"
select="$node"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>
<xsl:if
test="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/

3-10 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Sample data map file

smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;PSOccurrence&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;PSOccurrence&apos;]">
<xsl:call-template
name="PSOccurrence">
<xsl:with-param
name="node"
select="$node"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>
</smn:NODE>
</smn:NODES>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:template
name="ItemRevision">
<xsl:param
name="node"/>
<xsl:variable
name="currentIRnodeline"
select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;ItemRevision&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;ItemRevision&apos;]">
</xsl:variable>
<smn:NODE_LINE
CLASS="ItemRevision"
TYPE="CAEModelRevision"
STATE="MAPPING">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE
NAME="Description">
<xsl:attribute
name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@NAME=&apos;Description&apos;]/@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<smn:ATTR_NODE
NAME="Name">
<xsl:attribute
name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@NAME=&apos;Name&apos;]/@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<xsl:copy-of
select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/smn:VARIANTS"/>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:template
name="PSOccurrence">
<xsl:param
name="node"/>
<xsl:variable
name="currentPSnodeline"
select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;PSOccurrence&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;PSOccurrence&apos;]">
</xsl:variable>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-11
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<smn:NODE_LINE
CLASS="PSOccurrence"
TYPE="PSOccurrence"
STATE="MAPPING">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE
NAME="occurrence_name">
<xsl:attribute
name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="$currentPSnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@NAME=&apos;occurrence_name&apos;]/@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
</xsl:template>
</smr:RULES>

Use BOM line attributes to define data mapping rules

Analysts can create a simulation structure by applying a set of rules to a product structure. Before the
analysts can create the simulation structure, the administrator or lead analyst must define certain data
mapping rules.

• Example 1: Your site has a predictable number of levels in the product structure representing a similar
product organization. In such cases, your site administrator can define data mapping rules to leverage
properties from specific levels above the current object in the structure. for example, two levels above
the current object.

• Example 2: Your site has predictable types of objects in the product structure representing product
organization. In such cases, your site administrator can define data mapping rules to leverage
properties from a specific type of object that occurs above the current object in the structure. An
example of this is, the closest ancestor of the ProductDesign type, which is defined as a custom item
type at your site.

Note:
Teamcenter captures data mapping rules in an XML file. The administrator or lead analyst can use
any suitable text editor to create or edit the data mapping file.

The following are the default BOMLine attributes available in the TC_DATA\datamapping.xml file:

• Find No.: Find the number of the line in the structure.

• Relative Transformation Matrix: Structure Manager fills the absolute transformation matrix fields
when it rolls up the relative transformation matrices of the structure.

• ID In Context (Top Level): Shows only the identifier assigned to the line in the context of the loaded
top-level line. Any absolute occurrence identifiers defined at a level lower than the currently selected
top-level line are not visible.

3-12 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Common customization points in the data mapping file

• ID In Context (All Levels): Shows the identifiers assigned to the line in all contexts.

To view more attributes, select an item revision in the Product or Model view in CAE Manager, and click
the Generate Node XML icon. You can add any of these attributes by customizing the TC_DATA
\datamapping.xml file.

Common customization points in the data mapping file

The amount and type of data map customization needed is highly dependent on your business model.
However, the following are the most common customization points, which you can perform by using
the sample datamapping.xml file as a template and modifying it as needed:

• Supporting custom item types and item revision types. This is the most common customization
needed. The COTS behavior is to create a CAE Model item and item revision for each generic item
type in the product structure. In practice, most companies define custom item types to manage
product structure data.

• Supporting multiple product structure item types. For each product structure item type defined in
your business model, you need to create a corresponding rule in the data map. Depending on your
business model and workflows, each rule may call the same template, or you can define unique
templates for each rule.

• Defining rule-based naming for CAE items. You can define different naming conventions for the
resulting CAE Model items and item revisions, depending on the input product structure type.
For example, suppose you always mesh Pre/Post CAD data in Pre/Post, but you mesh IGES CAD data in
FEMAP. You can prepend CAE Model item names created from Pre/Post data with the string FEM-,
whereas CAE Model items created from IGES data use the string MOD-.

Note:
The combination of standard XSL with the provided rule and node schemas is powerful and
flexible, and depending on your knowledge of XSL, PLM XML, and your business model, much
more extensive customization is possible.

Create domains to define different data mapping rules

You can create domains to define different rules, for example, your organization might have different
CAE disciplines for safety, durability, and so on. The organization wants data mapping to be different for
each discipline, but there is only one data map XML file for the whole site. In such situations, you can
create and define domains. They help provide the flexibility to include different data mapping methods
for each discipline while executing structure maps.

After you define a domain, analysts can use the domain when they create a CAE Structure Map item
using the New CAE Item wizard.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-13
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Domains in the data map file

The following domains are available by default:

• CAE
This is the default domain.
Simulation analysts can select this domain to generate a model structure from an existing product
structure or a product collector for both the rich client and Active Workspace.
In addition, simulation analysts can generate model structures from an existing CAE geometry
structure on Active Workspace.

• CFD
This domain option is similar to the default CAE option. It additionally maps the JT files from the
source structure to the output structure.
Simulation analysts can select this domain to generate a model structure with mapped JT files from
an existing product structure or a product collector for both the rich client and Active Workspace.
In addition, simulation analysts can generate model structures with mapped JT files from an existing
CAE geometry structure on Active Workspace.

• CAEGA
Simulation analysts can select this domain to generate a geometry structure from an existing product
structure or a product collector that contains CAD assemblies. This is supported only on Active
Workspace.

For more information, see the Mapping Rule to map the 4GD structure using a Subset Item section in
the datamapping.xml file.

Create domains

For domains to be effective, the domain value in the New CAE Item wizard must match the domain
value defined in the datamapping.xml file.

3-14 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Create a custom data map from a template

1. Define all domains in Business Modeler IDE.

After you define domains, they are available to analysts in the Enter Additional Item Information
panel of the New CAE Item wizard.

Note:
The default domain is CAE and it is defined in the datamapping.xml file.

2. Add the domains to the datamapping.xml file.

Create a custom data map from a template

Use datamapping.xml as a template while creating a custom data map.

1. In the TC_DATA directory, locate the datamapping.xml file.

2. Create a copy of the data map file and give it a unique name.

3. Open the copy in a dedicated XML editor or a plain text editor.

4. Modify the file as needed to support your users and your business model.

5. To manage the data mapping definition file, in Teamcenter, create an item revision.

a. Click File→New→Item.

b. Click Assign to automatically generate the ID and revision identifiers.

c. Type a name for the item and click Finish.

6. Create a CAEStructureMap dataset in the item revision you created using a Specifications
relationship and import the customized data map file.

a. Choose the item revision within the item master for the item revision you created.

b. Click File→New→Dataset.

c. Click More and choose CAEStructureMap.

d. To import the customized data map file into the dataset as an XML reference, click Import.

e. From the Relation menu, select Specifications.

7. Modify the CAE_datamap_files_location preference to point to the created item revision.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-15
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Note:
Only a user with dba privileges can perform this step.
You can perform this any time after the item revision is created.

8. To test your custom data map, locate an existing product structure in My Teamcenter, right-click,
and choose Send To→CAE Manager.

9. In the Product view, select the BOM line (product structure), and from the view buttons, click the
Generate CAE Structure from Data Map icon.

10. Select a domain to execute the data map.

Clone or reference variant information

Simulation analysts can use predefined data map rules and structure map rules to create a model
structure from the product structure. Additionally, they can use predefined derivative rules to derive one
or more structures from an existing model structure. Derivative rules use both the data map and
structure map rules to derive structures.

The source structure contains variant information such as variant conditions, variant options, saved
variant rules (SVRs), option defaults, and rule checks. By default, the system clones the variant options
and SVRs to the target structure and maps the rest of the variant information to the target structure.

Some companies may have business practices that prevent the cloning of variant information. In such
cases, you (as a simulation administrator) can edit the varMappingValue attribute in the
datamapping.xml file to reference the variant options and SVRs instead of cloning the information.

1. Open the datamapping.xml file.

2. To reference variant information while creating a model structure from a product structure:

a. Search for Variants in the Item Revision template.

Example:

<!--*************************************************************
********* Item Revision template ************
*************************************************************-->
<xsl:template name="ItemRevision">
<xsl:param name="node" />
<xsl:variable name="currentIRnodeline" select="$node/smn:NODES/
smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;ItemRevision&apos;
and @TYPE=&apos;ItemRevision&apos;]">
</xsl:variable>

3-16 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Clone or reference variant information

<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEModelRevision" TYPE="CAEModelRevision"

STATE="MAPPING">
<!--
*************************************************************
********* Item Revision attributes *************

The input item revision attributes that need to populate

the output's item revision atrributes go here.
*************************************************************-->
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<!-- Input's Description transferred to output's attribute
of
same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="$currentIRnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/

smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_desc&apos;]/
@VALUE" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<!-- Input's Name transferred to output's attribute of
same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of
select="concat('CAE-',$currentIRnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/

smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_name&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

<xsl:call-template name="Variants">
<xsl:with-param name="node" select="$node" />
<xsl:with-param name="varMappingValue"
select="&apos;CLONE&apos;" />
</xsl:call-template>

</xsl:template>

b. To reference SVRs, variant conditions, variant options, option defaults, and rule checks, edit as
follows:

Default varMappingValue:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-17
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<xsl:with-param name="varMappingValue"
select="&apos;CLONE&apos;" />

Change to:

<xsl:with-param name="varMappingValue"
select="&apos;REFER&apos;" />

Tip:
If you do not want to use variant information at your site, remove the Variants template.

3. To reference variant information while deriving structures:

a. Search for Variants in the CAE Model Revision template.

Example:

<!--*************************************************************
********* CAEModel Revision template ************
*************************************************************-->
<xsl:template name="CAEModelRevision">
<xsl:param name="node" />
<xsl:variable name="currentIRnodeline" select="$node/smn:NODES/
smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;CAEModelRevision&apos;
and @TYPE=&apos;CAEModelRevision&apos;]">
</xsl:variable>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEModelRevision" TYPE="CAEModelRevision"
STATE="MAPPING">
<!--
*************************************************************
********* CAEModel Revision attributes *************

The input CAEModel revision attributes that need to populate

the output's CAEModel revision atrributes go here.
*************************************************************-->
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<!-- Input's Description transferred to output's attribute
of
same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="$currentIRnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/

smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_desc&apos;]/

3-18 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure data map and structure map rules to improve system performance

@VALUE" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<!-- Input's Name transferred to output's attribute of
same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('',$currentIRnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/

smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_name&apos;]/
@VALUE)" />
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

<xsl:call-template name="Variants">
<xsl:with-param name="node" select="$node" />
<xsl:with-param name="varMappingValue"
select="&apos;CLONE&apos;" />
</xsl:call-template>

</xsl:template>

b. To reference SVRs, variant conditions, variant options, option defaults, and rule checks, edit as
follows:

Default varMappingValue:

<xsl:with-param name="varMappingValue"
select="&apos;CLONE&apos;" />

Change to:

<xsl:with-param name="varMappingValue"
select="&apos;REFER&apos;" />

Configure data map and structure map rules to improve system performance

In CAE Manager, analysts can execute the Generate Node XML command after selecting a BOM line in
the Product or Model view. Teamcenter processes all items, item revisions, forms, and BOM line
attributes for each BOM line in the input structure. If the structures are very large, it impacts the
performance and memory usage of the system.

Simulation Process Management provides a configuration XML file that the simulation administrator can
edit to control which items, item revisions, forms, or BOM line attributes are processed. The
administrator can edit the required attributes in the XML file in such a way that Teamcenter processes

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-19
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

only those needed attributes. This significantly improves the performance and memory usage of data
map and structure map execution operations.

The NodeXMLConfig.xml sample file is located in the TC_DATA directory. However, the file used at
runtime is managed in a CAEStructureMap dataset attached to the item revision indicated by the
CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

The attributes of the NodeXMLConfig.xml sample file are as follows:

Note:
All attributes are mandatory except the DOMAIN attribute.

• SM_CONFIG_ITEM ITEM_TYPE=”Item”: The item type for which you need to configure attributes.
If you do not specify the ITEM_TYPE attribute, then all attributes are used and the configuration is not
applicable.

• DOMAIN="CAE": The domain to which the configuration is applied.

If no domain is specified, Teamcenter applies the configuration to all the domains.

• FOCUS="IN": You can set it to:

• IN to apply the configuration to the input structure.

• OUT to apply the configuration to the output structure.

• ““ (no value): to apply the configuration to both the input and output structures.

• STATUS="INACTIVE": You can set it to:

• INACTIVE for Teamcenter to generate the node XML file for all the attributes. This means that all
data map and structure map rules defined for any attributes are executed.

• ACTIVE for Teamcenter to generate the node XML file for only the defined attributes. This means
that data map and structure map rules for only configured attributes are executed.

Note:
You must configure all attributes that you want to use as ACTIVE. If you do not configure
them as active, analysts cannot use any data mapping rules.
If product structures are very large, they impact the performance and memory usage of the
system. Therefore, you must set only those attributes that are required for processing as
ACTIVE.

• Define list of mapped attributes for output objects.

3-20 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure data map and structure map rules to improve system performance

While using the CAE Attribute Compare dialog box, analysts can compare some or all mapped
attributes in a model structure to current values in the product structure if you set the MAPPED
attribute to true.

<SM_CONFIG_ITEM ITEM_TYPE="Item" DOMAIN="CAE" FOCUS="IN" STATUS="ACTIVE">

<smn:NODES xmlns:smn="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMENode">
<smn:NODE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Item" TYPE="Item">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id" NAME="ID"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_type" NAME="Type"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids" NAME="Project IDs"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Form" TYPE="Item Master">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:NODE_LINKS>
<smn:NODE_LINK CLASS="Item"
RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="IMAN_master_form"
TYPE="Item"/>
</smn:NODE_LINKS>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="ItemRevision" TYPE="ItemRevision">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id" NAME="ID"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_revision_id"
NAME="Revision"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids" NAME="Project IDs"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="structure_revisions"
NAME="BOM View Revisions"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="release_status_list"
NAME="Release Status"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="owning_user" NAME="Owner"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="owning_group" NAME="Group ID"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="creation_date" NAME="Date
Created"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="last_mod_date"
NAME="Last Modified Date"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Form" TYPE="ItemRevision Master">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-21
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"/>

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="user_data_1" NAME="User Data 1"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="user_data_2" NAME="User Data 2"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="user_data_3" NAME="User Data 3"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:NODE_LINKS>
<smn:NODE_LINK CLASS="ItemRevision"
RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="IMAN_master_form" TYPE="ItemRevision"/>
</smn:NODE_LINKS>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<!-- Dataset types to be included for use in data mapping rules,
no attributes are required -->
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Dataset" TYPE="DirectModel">
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Dataset" TYPE="UGMASTER">
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Dataset" TYPE="Text">
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="BOMLine" TYPE="BOMLine">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_sequence_no" NAME="Find No."/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_plmxml_occ_xform"
NAME="Relative
Transformation Matrix"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_abs_occ_all_ids" NAME="ID In
Context (All Levels)"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_abs_occ_id" NAME="ID In
Context
(Top Level)"/>
<!-- Attributes to be used to identify root and sub-assembly
BOMlines for setting Context -->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_formatted_parent_name"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_rev_object_name"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
</smn:NODE>
</smn:NODES>
</SM_CONFIG_ITEM>
<SM_CONFIG_ITEM ITEM_TYPE="CAEModel" DOMAIN="CAE" FOCUS="OUT"
STATUS="ACTIVE">
<smn:NODES xmlns:smn="http://www.ugs.com/Schemas/SMENode">
<smn:NODE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEModel" TYPE="CAEModel">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"
MAPPED="true"/>

3-22 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure data map and structure map rules to improve system performance

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id" NAME="ID"/>

<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_type" NAME="Type"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids" NAME="Project IDs"
MAPPED="true"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Form" TYPE="CAEModel Master">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"
MAPPED="true"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:NODE_LINKS>
<smn:NODE_LINK CLASS="CAEModel"
RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="IMAN_master_form"
TYPE="CAEModel"/>
</smn:NODE_LINKS>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEModelRevision" TYPE="CAEModelRevision">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id" NAME="ID"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_revision_id"
NAME="Revision"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids" NAME="Project IDs"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="structure_revisions"
NAME="BOM View Revisions"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="release_status_list"
NAME="Release Status" MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="owning_user" NAME="Owner"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="owning_group" NAME="Group ID"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="creation_date" NAME="Date
Created"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="last_mod_date"
NAME="Last Modified Date"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="analysis_types" NAME="Analysis
Types"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="solver_name" NAME="Solver Name"
MAPPED="true"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Form" TYPE="CAEModelRevision Master">

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-23
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="user_data_1" NAME="User Data 1"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="user_data_2" NAME="User Data 2"
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="user_data_3" NAME="User Data 3"
MAPPED="true"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:NODE_LINKS>
<smn:NODE_LINK CLASS="CAEModelRevision"
RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="IMAN_master_form"
TYPE="CAEModelRevision" MAPPED="true"/>
</smn:NODE_LINKS>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="BOMLine" TYPE="BOMLine">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_sequence_no" NAME="Find No."
MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_plmxml_occ_xform"
NAME="Relative
Transformation Matrix" MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_abs_occ_all_ids"
NAME="ID In Context (All Levels)" MAPPED="true"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_abs_occ_id"
NAME="ID In Context (Top Level)" MAPPED="true"/>
<!-- Attributes to be used to identify root and sub-assembly
BOMlines for setting Context -->
<!-- not actually needed for output, but included for
consistency -->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_formatted_parent_name"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="bl_rev_object_name"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>
</smn:NODE>
</smn:NODES>
</SM_CONFIG_ITEM>
</SM_NODEXML_CONFIGURATION>

Define data mapping rules to map datasets or map project information

You can create a CAE Model structure by applying a set of data mapping rules to a product structure.

The procedure for defining data mapping rules to map datasets and map project information is similar.
The simulation administrator first edits the datamapping.xml file to add data mapping rules. The

3-24 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define data mapping rules to map datasets or map project information

analyst then loads the product structure and creates a model structure by choosing the CAE Model from
DataMap option.

1. In Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→CAE Structure Map.

3. Click the Browse button beside the Data Map Files Location box to open the Search dialog box.

4. Enter the item revision that is configured for the data map definition location and click the Search
button.

5. Download the data map definition file (datamapping.xml file) from the dataset attached to the
item revision.

6. Add additional rules to map datasets or map project information by editing the datamapping.xml
file.
Example 1 — Attach all datasets of DirectModel type with Rendering relationship to ItemRevision
to be mapped as copied to the output model with the same relation.
For this example, assume that the analyst loads a product item revision with a DirectModel dataset
type with Rendering relationship, DirectModel dataset type with Specifications relationship, and
CAEMesh dataset type with Specifications relationship in the Product view. When the analyst
applies the following data mapping rule (example 1), the system creates a corresponding model
structure in the Model view and only DirectModel dataset types with Rendering relationship are
copied across to the model structure. Similarly, for each product item type in your business model,
you can create data mapping rules and create corresponding CAE item types based on your site
requirements.

<!-- All attach datasets of type DirectModel to

input item revisions -->
<xsl:for-each select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;Dataset&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;DirectModel&apos;]">

<!-- Only relationship Rendering to input itemrevision

to be copied to
output CAE Model revisions with same relationship -->
<xsl:if test="smn:NODE_LINKS/smn:NODE_LINK/
@RELATIONSHIP_TYPE=
&apos;IMAN_Rendering&apos;">
<xsl:call-template name="Dataset">
<xsl:with-param name="operationtype">COPY</
xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="outrelationshiptype"
select="smn:NODE_LINKS/
smn:NODE_LINK/@RELATIONSHIP_TYPE"/>
<xsl:with-param name="parenttype">CAEModelRevision</
xsl:with-param>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-25
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<xsl:with-param name="datasettype" select="@TYPE"/>

</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>

Example 2 — Map project information and assign the default project ID.
For this example, assume that the analyst loads a product item revision in the Product view and
assigns P1 and P2 projects from the Project application. When the analyst applies the following
data mapping rule (example 2), the system automatically assigns P1 and P2 project objects to the
item revision.

Note:
If a configuration file is used for data mapping, you must configure project IDs (project_ids)
for appropriate types.

<!--Example: To map the project information and

assign default project id -->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="$currentnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;project_ids&apos;]/
@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
<!--Example of default project id -->
<xsl:attribute name="DEFAULT_VALUE"></xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>

7. Save the datamapping.xml file and upload it to the dataset attached to the item revision.

Best practices to optimize performance while using data mapping and reuse
rules

Use preferences to optimize performance

• CAE_persist_StructureMapLog: Controls whether a log is attached as a dataset to the root item

revision of the created structure in a data map or a structure map.
The default value for this user preference is 0, that is, no log is attached as a dataset to the root item
revision.
To improve performance, do not generate logs.

• CAE_structuremap_log_content_scope: Persists the summary level information in the dataset

captured by the structure map log. The structure map log, identified by the
CAE_structuremap_log_dataset_name preference, is captured in a dataset and attached to the root
item revision of the output structure.
The default value for this user preference is Summary to persist the summary level information in the
dataset.

3-26 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Guidelines for setting attributes using configuration file

You can improve performance by persisting only the summary level information and this minimizes
the amount of time spent writing to a file.

• CAE_datamap_object_creation_limit: Sets the limit for objects that can be created in memory
before committing the objects to the database.
The default value for this site preference is 5000.
The goal is to increase this preference value to effectively reduce the number of round trips to the
minimum, for example, setting a limit of 5000 objects would approximately be a 625 BOMLine
structure (see below). If the target BOM structure is 1000 BOM lines, then increasing the limit to
10,000 reduces the number of round trips to 1.
The preference was designed to restrict the structure map engine from consuming excessive memory.
You must limit the balance because consuming large amounts of memory can force the hardware to
swap memory more frequently, slowing down parallel processes.
An item/revision consists of several objects, for example, typical item aggregation consists of the
following (8–12 objects): item, master form, item revision, item revision master form, target
relationship, source relationship, BOMView, BOMView Revision, specification relationship and the
dataset. Additional custom forms or datasets can affect the number proportionally.
Since the preference is also impacted by the number of attributes being mapped, you must reduce
the number of objects. If you map a large number of attributes, it can make the objects unusually
large in aggregation.

• CAE_enable_AncestorMapping: Enables ancestor mapping by adding the node XML interpretations

for all BOMline ancestors of BOMlines to structure maps in CAE Manager.
By default, ancestor mapping is not enabled. The default value for this site preference is 0.
This preference allows data mapping to pull attributes from parent objects into the hierarchy of the
structure. However, that requires additional processing and can reduce performance. For best
performance, you should disable ancestor mapping.

• CAE_enable_Mark_up_to_date: Enable or disable the Mark-Up-To-Date option for attachment

changes to CAE Model and CAE Analysis item revisions in CAE Manager to improve the performance
of data mapping rules against large structures.
In a complex product development environment, different analysts perform different tasks in the
overall analysis. In such scenarios, it becomes critical to know when analysis data, possibly with
multiple dependencies, is out of date. The analyst can then act on it and ensure that the analysis is
built with the correct set of data to deliver accurate results. In CAE Manager, analysts can check for
later revisions of item revisions attached to CAE Model and CAE Analysis item revisions. They can
also check for changes to any attachments of item revisions.
The default value for this user preference is OFF.
You can improve performance by retaining this setting, that is, keep this preference set to OFF. This
reduces the number of secondary objects that are created. However, note that analysts must
subsequently mark the BOMlines as up-to-date.

Guidelines for setting attributes using configuration file

You can edit the NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration XML file to control which items, item revisions,
forms, or BOM line attributes are processed. You can edit the required attributes in the XML file in such a
way that Teamcenter processes only those needed attributes. This significantly improves the
performance and memory usage of data map and structure map execution operations.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-27
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

While editing the NodeXMLConfig.xml file:

• Ensure that each item type you want to use for data mapping or structure mapping for both output
and input is present and the state is set to STATUS="ACTIVE". This means that data map and structure
map rules are executed only for the configured attributes.

• Identify the attributes and NODELines you want to use for data mapping or to be compared against in
structure map rules and set only those attributes that are required for processing as ACTIVE.

Guidelines for specifying data map rules

• You should identify the data map rules for the map item types or attributes exposed in the
NodeXMLConfig file.

• You must map the datasets you identify as reference and not as copy. Datasets that are mapped as
copy require extra processing and impact the performance of the data mapping operation.

• Mapping project IDs:

• Minimize the number of projects you want to map. If all the projects associated with the product
structure are not relevant to the CAE Model structure, exclude them from the maps. This can be
done using detailed data map rules.

• Ensure that project IDs are valid for the user to access. Invalid project IDs can reduce the
performance of data mapping.

• Map the project IDs at the item revision level. Assigning project IDs at the item level requires the
system to assign the project ID to the item as well as the item revision.

• For optimal performance, use CAE Target Occurrence Relationship for components the analyst
wants to evaluate at the attribute level. This is typically the lower subassembly levels.
Set the context once at the root or at distinct subassembly levels. Avoid multiple overlapping contexts
as they degrade performance significantly and cause unintended data mapping results with the
introduction of multiple occurrences.

Guidelines for setting reuse rules

• The CAE_Apply_Reuse_Rules_to_SubAssemblies preference determines whether to apply reuse

rules to subassemblies or just to component level product structures within a structure.
By default, this site preference is set to TRUE. When set to TRUE all reuse rules are applied to every
BOMLine in a BOM structure, thus reducing the performance.
To improve performance, you must set this preference to FALSE to restrict executing reuse rules to
the leaf nodes of a product BOM structure.

• Implement multiple subtypes for how CAE Model objects are reused. Consider creating subtypes of
the CAE Model based on group ownership or analysis type. Reuse criteria is applied to all objects of

3-28 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Set preferences to control data maps and structure maps

the type returned by the rule scope definition. Therefore, restricting that list to the objects of a
particular analysis or group can improve performance.

• The order of reuse rules is important. Rules are executed one at a time against the entire list of
objects related to the target object. The first rule is applied to each object in that list before the
second rule is applied. To improve performance, order the rules based on the frequency of execution.

Define data map and structure map preferences

Set preferences to control data maps and structure maps

Analysts can use CAE Manager to generate a CAE structure from an existing product structure or BOM.
Typically, the CAE structure is similar to but not the same as the product structure. They can use
structure maps to automate the creation of CAE structures.

The administrator can use the following preferences:

• CAE_create_GeneratedByRelationship to control whether a structure map relationship is

maintained between the root item revision of the created structure and the defining structure map.

• CAE_persist_StructureMapLog to control whether a log is attached as a dataset to the root item

revision of the created structure in a data map or a structure map.

• CAE_enable_AncestorMapping to enable ancestor mapping. This adds the node XML interpretations
of all the BOMline ancestors of BOMlines to structure maps in the CAE Manager application.

• CAE_ancestorMapping_level to specify the maximum levels of ancestors to include in an XML node

during ancestor mapping in the CAE Manager application.

• CAE_structureMap_log_dataset_name to specify the name of the dataset to be created while

executing the data map and structure map to maintain the data map and structure map log file.

• CAE_datamap_files_location to specify the unique ID (UID) of the item revision used to manage the
data map definition files. The administrator must specify this preference for analysts to use data map
or structure map functions.

Note:
Only a user with DBA privileges can define structure map preferences.

Define data map location and other data map and structure map options

1. In Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→StructureMap.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-29
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

3. (Optional) To specify the data map file location.

1. In Data Map Files Location field, click Browse.

2. In the Search dialog box, choose Item Revision.

3. From the Type menu, choose any type of revision, and click Search.

4. From the Folders list, select an item revision.

5. In the Selected Item Revision list, click Add and then click OK.

4. Ensure that the Create relationships between CAE Model and StructureMap check box is
selected (default setting) to control whether a structure map relationship is maintained between
the root item revision of the created structure and the defining structure map.

5. Specify structure map log options.

1. (Optional) Select the Persist StructureMap log check box to control whether a log is attached
as a dataset to the root item revision of the created structure in a data map or a structure
map.

The StructureMap Log Dataset Name dataset is used to store the data map or structure map
log and this log is persisted across the site.

2. To specify detailed logs for structure maps, select Detailed. The default option is Summary.

6. (Optional) Select the Enable ancestor data mapping check box to enable ancestor mapping.
You can select the appropriate value to specify the maximum levels of ancestors to include in an
XML node during ancestor mapping.
This adds the node XML interpretations of all the BOMLine ancestors of BOMLines to structure
maps in the CAE Manager.

7. Specify the appropriate value in the StructureMap maximum objects in memory box. The default
value is 5000.

8. To apply reuse rules to subassemblies, select True. This is the default option.

9. To disable mark up-to-date, select OFF. This is the default option.

10. To select a folder for the output objects, select the Newstuff, None, or Other Folder option.
Newstuff is the default option.
If you select Other Folder, click Browse to select another folder.

11. To enable automatic validation of structure map rules, select True. This is the default option.

3-30 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define data map rules to generate model structures

12. To copy output objects as items or item revisions in the selected output folder (created in step 10),
select Item or Item Revision.
The CAE_datamap_paste_output_options preference determines the configured value. If this
preference is set to:

• Item, the system pastes the output items to the configured output folder.

• Item Revision, the system pastes the output item revisions to the configured output folder.

Define data map rules to generate model structures containing CAE

geometry

Define data map rules to generate model structures

You can define data mapping rules to help analysts automate the creation of CAE geometry. You define
data mapping rules in the datamapping.xml file. You also configure the NodeXMLConfig.xml file to
specify the required items, item revisions, or BOM line attributes required for processing the model
output.

Simulation analysts can create a CAE model structure from an input product structure, using data
mapping rules. The default rules are used for creating primary objects. These rules determine the
creation and naming pattern of model items and item revisions from the product structure, the mapping
of product items to model items, and the relations between the product item revisions and model item
revisions.

In addition, you can optionally enable data mapping rules for secondary objects. These allow simulation
analysts to create a CAE model structure containing primary objects from the default rules as well as
secondary objects from the additional rules. The secondary objects contain CAE geometry with the
appropriate relationships between the input product structure and the secondary object or between the
primary output object and the secondary output object.

Note:
The rules for primary objects are available by default in the datamapping.xml file. However, the
xsl: call-template attributes to create secondary objects are commented, and you must
uncomment these lines to enable the creation of secondary objects.

Before customizing the data map for secondary objects, you must know the attributes and relationships
you want to map. The Business Modeler IDE is a tool for configuring and extending the data model of
your Teamcenter installation. You must turn on Operation Descriptors for the attributes and
relationships of any objects that you want to map before executing data map rules against these objects.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-31
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Tip:
By default, all the attributes and their relationships required for secondary objects in the
datamapping.xml file are defined in the CreateInput operation on the Operation Descriptor tab
for business objects. You need to define new attributes and their relationships in Business Modeler
IDE only if you plan to customize the data mapping file by adding new attributes.
Similarly, all the required items, item revisions, or BOM line attributes required for processing the
model output for secondary objects are defined in the NodeXMLConfig.xml file. You need to edit
this file only if you plan to add any new attributes.

Edit the data map file to include CAE Geometry items as secondary objects

You have to edit the data map file to include CAE Geometry items as secondary objects.

1. Open the TC_DATA\datamapping.xml file in an XML editor.

2. Search for the SecondaryGeometry template and uncomment the tags before and after the
xsl:call-template attributes.

<!-- Example 1: Call template to create CAE Geometry as a secondary output

object and a node with name geometry1_node_name -->
<!--Begin SECONDARY_OBJECT_CREATION -->
<!-- <xsl:call-template name="SecondaryGeometry">
<xsl:with-param name="node" select="$node"/>
</xsl:call-template> -->
<!--End SECONDARY_OBJECT_CREATION -->

When an analyst creates a CAE model structure from the input product structure, the system checks
each leaf node in the input structure and creates corresponding CAE geometry output items for each
item in the input structure. Additionally, it copies input item names and appends the CAE string to the
output item names for each corresponding item. Similarly, each input item description is copied to the
corresponding output item and appended with the CAE string.

CAE geometry item attributes example:

<!--*******************************************
******************** CAE Geometry attributes
**************************
The input item attributes that need to populate the output's atrributes
go here.
***************************************************************************-
->
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<!-- Input's Name transferred to output's attribute of same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">

3-32 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Edit the data map file to include CAE Geometry items as secondary objects

<xsl:value-of select="concat('CAE-',$currentItemnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_name&apos;]/@VALUE)"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<!-- Input's Description transferred to output's attribute of same
name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('CAE-',$currentItemnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=
&apos;object_desc&apos;]/@VALUE)"/>
<!-- Example 1 - To specify ancestor node level -->
<!-- <xsl:for-each select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:PNODES/
smn:PNODE">
<xsl:if test="@LEVEL = &apos;2&apos;">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('CAE-',currentItemnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;
object_desc&apos;]/@VALUE)"/>
</xsl:if>
</xsl:for-each> -->
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>

After setting the geometry item attributes, the system calls the geometry revision template to copy the
geometry item revision attributes and their description. Each input item revision name and input item
revision description is copied to the output structure.

Geometry revision template example:

<!--Conditional logic to call the CAE Geometry Revision template-->

<xsl:if test="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;
ItemRevision&apos; and @TYPE=&apos;ItemRevision&apos;]">
<xsl:call-template name="SecondaryGeometryRevision">
<xsl:with-param name="node" select="$node"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>

CAE geometry item revision attributes example:

<xsl:template name="SecondaryGeometryRevision">
<xsl:param name="node"/>
<xsl:variable name="currentIRnodeline" select="$node/smn:NODES/
smn:NODE/smn:NODE_LINE
[@CLASS=&apos;ItemRevision&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;ItemRevision&apos;]">
</xsl:variable>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-33
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="CAEGeometryRevision"
TYPE="CAEGeometryRevision"
STATE="MAPPING">

<!--
*************************************************************
********* CAE Geometry Revision attributes
*************

The input Item revision attributes that need to populate

the output's CAE Geometry revision atrributes go here.
*************************************************************-->
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<!-- Input's Description transferred to output's attribute
of
same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="$currentIRnodeline/smn:ATTR_NODES/
smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=&apos;object_desc&apos;]/
@VALUE"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
<!-- Input's Name transferred to output's attribute of
same name-->
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name">
<xsl:attribute name="VALUE">
<xsl:value-of select="concat('CAE-',$currentIRnodeline/
smn:ATTR_NODES/smn:ATTR_NODE[@INTERNAL_NAME=
&apos;object_name&apos;]/@VALUE)"/>
</xsl:attribute>
</smn:ATTR_NODE>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
</smn:NODE_LINE>

</xsl:template>

In addition, a CAE Target Relationship is created between the output object (CAE Model, CAE
Geometry, or CAE Analysis item revision) and the input item revision as specified in the
NODE_RELATIONS sections.

CAE Target Relationship creation example:

<smn:NODE_RELATIONS>
<!-- To create TC_CAE_Target relationship with ItemRevision -->
<!-- Begin SECONDARY_OBJECT_RELATIONSHIP_CREATION -->
<smn:NODE_RELATION RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="TC_CAE_Target">
<smn:PRIMARY_NODE CLASS="ItemRevision" TYPE="CAEGeometryRevision"
FOCUS="OUT"/>

3-34 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Set the data map files location for the updated data mapping rule

<smn:SECONDARY_NODE CLASS="ItemRevision" TYPE="ItemRevision"

FOCUS="IN"/>
</smn:NODE_RELATION>
<!-- End SECONDARY_OBJECT_RELATIONSHIP_CREATION -->
</smn:NODE_RELATIONS>

Set the data map files location for the updated data mapping rule

You can define a data mapping rule to create only primary objects with relationships and another rule to
create both primary and secondary objects with relationships for CAE geometry. To manage multiple
rules, create different item revisions for each rule. Use the Data Map Files Location box in the Options
dialog box to specify the appropriate item revision for the rule you want the analyst to run while
creating the CAE model from the input product structure.

1. In My Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options→CAE Tools.

2. Click Search in the Data Map Files Location, and specify you search parameters.

3. Click the Execute the search option and select the appropriate item revision containing the data
map rule you want the analyst to run.

4. To specify the item revision, click Apply.

Specify comparison options for model and product structures

Specify comparison options for the Inspector view

The Inspector view in CAE Manager allows analysts to compare a CAE model structure against a product
structure.

The CAE Tools→Inspector option allows you to configure default actions for certain criteria used to
evaluate the CAE model structure against the product structure.

Define product structure attributes

1. In Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→Inspector.

3. Click the Product Structure tab.

4. Select the appropriate criteria and default actions.

The following table describes the product structure criteria.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-35
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Criteria Description

Product with no Model Use this to determine whether the product BOM line is
linked to any CAE Model BOM line in the model
structure.

Missing Model Components Use this to determine whether the number of BOM lines
for a CAE Model item revision is less than the number of
BOM lines of the linked product item revision.

Define simulation structure attributes

1. Click the Model Structure tab.

2. Select the appropriate criteria and default actions.

The following table describes the simulation structure criteria.

Criteria Description

Model With Different Product Use this to determine if the CAE Model BOM line is
Revision Target linked to a different revision of the product BOM line.

Model With No Product Use this to determine if the CAE Model BOM line is not
linked to any product BOM line in the product structure.

Extra Model Components Use this to determine if the number of BOM lines for a
CAE Model item revision is more than the number of
BOM lines of the linked product item revision.

Define root node attributes

1. Click the Root Node tab.

2. From the Default Root BOMLine Action menu, choose:

• Do Nothing to take no action.

• Use Revised Model to create a new revision of the model structure.

• Use New Model to use a new model to create a new item.

3. From the Default New Model Action Item Type menu, select an appropriate item type such as
CAE Model.

3-36 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Prerequisites for configuring CAE BOM comparison

Configure attribute values for comparing structures

Prerequisites for configuring CAE BOM comparison

• Set up the MEMaxOpenViewsSameType preference.

You must set up this preference for configuring CAE BOM comparison. This preference defines the
maximum number of Product or Model views that an analyst can open in CAE Manager. The default
value is 10.

• Import the new CAE BOM Comparison report to Teamcenter.

Note:
Perform this only for the 10.1.2 release and patch upgrades later.

1. Create a stage directory, for example, D:\workdir.

2. Create a TC_10_1_02_CUS_RPT_CAE_BOM_CMP folder in the stage directory, for example,

D:\workdir\TC_10_1_02_CUS_RPT_CAE_BOM_CMP.

3. Create a Resources subfolder in the TC_10_1_02_CUS_RPT_CAE_BOM_CMP folder, for

example, D:\workdir\TC_10_1_02_CUS_RPT_CAE_BOM_CMP\Resources.

4. Copy the TC_DATA\crf\TC_10_1_02_CUS_RPT_CAE_BOM_CMP.xml file to the TC_10_1_02-

_CUS_RPT_CAE_BOM_CMP folder.

5. Copy the TC_DATA\crf\Resources\cae_bom_compare_rpt_excel.xsl file to the Resources

subfolder.

6. Copy the TC_DATA\crf\Resources\cae_bom_compare_rpt_excel_OOXML.xsl file to the

Resources subfolder.

7. Run the following command from the Teamcenter command prompt:

import_export_reports -u=infodba -p=password -g=dba -import -overwrite -
stageDir=D:\workdir -reportFile=TC_DATA\crf\CrfReport.xml -reportId=TC_10_1_02_CUS_RPT_-
CAE_BOM_CMP

8. Import new closure rules for the CAE BOM Comparison report to Teamcenter.

Note:
Perform this only for the 10.1.2 release and patch upgrades later.

Run the following commands from the Teamcenter command prompt:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-37
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

tcxml_import -u=infodba -p=password -g=dba -scope_rules -scope_rules_-

mode=overwrite -file=TC_DATA\caeBomCompareScopeRules.xml

install_callback -u=infodba -p=password -g=dba -mode=install -type=Accountability-

CheckCriteria -library=libcae -function=CAE_BOM_Comparison_find_no_criteria_instance -
name=CAE_BOM_Cmp_Find_No_Criteria

Configure attribute values for structure comparison

Analysts can use Simulation Process Management to quickly create one or more simulation variants from
an existing simulation variant, make modifications to the structure, and view the differences between
simulation variants. Typically, these simulation variants are complex and it is not possible to compare
more than two simulation variants at a time and understand their differences.

They can use CAE Manager to view two different simulation variants side-by-side for a comparison, get a
visual understanding of their differences as they are color coded, and can further investigate differences
in attributes such as thickness, associated files or load cases, and file content.

You must configure partial match properties by selecting an item revision type and the properties for
this item revision type that the analyst can use for comparing structures.

1. Choose Edit→Options→CAE BOM Comparison.

2. Select User, Group, or Site as appropriate.

3. Select an item revision type, and select the properties that you want analysts to use for comparing
structures.

Configure different types of analysis or CAE packages using

standard templates

Configure analysis or CAE packages

Analyst groups in companies typically perform multiple types of analyses based on a product definition
or a set of requirements and validate them, for example, strength analysis, durability analysis, fluid
analysis, or crash analysis. They also perform analyses multiple times, for example, based on different
load cases or different input geometry variations. The processes and tools used and the input and
output may vary across analyses.

To create an analysis package for a specific type of analysis, the analysts must know which items,
datasets, and relationships to create and then create multiple CAE item revisions one at a time and
establish relationships between different item revisions. The simulation administrator or a user with DBA
privileges creates site-level package definitions, the group administrator creates group-level package
definitions, and individual users create user-level package definitions based on a common template and
save them to the database to make this process easier and more efficient. Analysts can then use the

3-38 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Specify a folder for output objects

package definitions created by the simulation administrator or the group administrator to create their
own CAE item revisions.

At a site, you may have different categories of analysis packages:

• Site-level package definitions.

These are standardized and approved package definitions created by the simulation administrator or a
user with DBA privileges and used by multiple analysts across the enterprise to create a set of CAE
item revisions for a specific analysis.
Using this, analysts can define input parts (item revisions), output items, the relationships between
the output item revision to their input parts, and the output datasets within one or more output item
revisions.

• Group-level package definitions.

These are standardized and approved package definitions created by the group administrator and
used by multiple analysts across the enterprise to create a set of CAE item revisions for a specific
analysis. Access to these are limited to members of that group.

• User-level package definitions.

These are created by an analyst and used only by this analyst.

Package definitions are stored in a CAE configuration object. You can use the
cae_migrate_configurations utility to move packages definitions from one database to another.

You can configure CAE package definitions to allow analysts to:

• Create BOM view revision (BVR) relations between various output and input objects in CAE packages.

• Refer or copy existing datasets as output objects.

Note:
A user with DBA privileges can run the cae_convert_package_configuration utility to convert
CAE package configurations prior to the 11.5 release to a new CAE configuration object.

Specify a folder for output objects

1. In CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE→CAE Packages.

3. To specify a folder for output objects, select Directly in location folder or In a subfolder under
location folder.

4. To enable the creation of logs after simulation analysts create CAE packages from predefined
definitions, select the Persist CAE Package Log option.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-39
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

By default, logs are disabled.

5. To copy output objects as items or item revisions in the selected output folder (created in the
earlier step), select Item or Item Revision.
The CAE_packages_paste_output_options preference determines the configured value. If this
preference is set to:

• Item, the system pastes the output items to the configured output folder.

• Item Revision, the system pastes the output item revisions to the configured output folder.

6. Click OK to save and exit the Options dialog box.

Define input and output, and relationship parameters for CAE packages

The following preferences are used to manage CAE package definitions:

• CAE_packages_create_subfolder to allow the system to paste output objects created using CAE
package definitions in a subfolder.
• CAE_packages_output_location_folder to define the default folder location for output objects
created using CAE package definitions. The default value is Newstuff.
• CAE_packages_paste_output_options to decide whether the output item or item revision is pasted
in the folder defined the CAE_packages_output_location_folder preference. The default value is
item revision.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose CAE Package
Configuration .

2. Select the SITE, GROUP, or USER option, and click the Create CAE Package icon.

3. (Optional) In the Create CAE Package dialog box, to assign an ID, click Assign in the ID box.

4. (Optional) To assign a revision number, click Assign in the Revision box.

5. (Mandatory) To specify a derivative rule name, type a unique name in the Name box.

6. (Optional) Type a description in the Description box.

7. Configure input parameters.

3-40 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define input and output, and relationship parameters for CAE packages

a. Click the Input Configuration tab.

b. (Optional) Enter a description for the CAE package in the Description box.

c. Click the Add button to add parameters.

d. In the Descriptor column, choose the default value or overwrite it with a unique value, and
from the Type column, select an appropriate item revision.

e. Click the Apply button.

8. Configure output parameters.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-41
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

You can configure a CAE package containing a standalone output item (with or without datasets)
and multiple output items (with or without datasets) where one or more items are connected or
not connected to other items.

a. Click the Output Configuration tab, and click the Add button to add parameters.

b. (Optional) Clear the check boxes in the Paste in Output Folder column if you do not want to
paste the output items and item revisions to the default output folder.

Note:
For all migrated packages from previous releases, the check boxes remain selected, that
is, the system pastes the output items and item revisions to the default output folder.

c. In the Descriptor column, choose the default value or overwrite it with a unique value, and
from the Type column, select an appropriate option.
Example:

Descriptor Type Naming Item attributes Revision attributes

pattern

model_output CAE Model “CAE-”- Attribute name: Attribute name:

INPUTNAME Previous Version ID Analysis Type
Value: 000085 Value: Thermal

sim_output CAE “CAE-”INPUTID Attribute name: Attribute name:

Analysis Previous Version ID Solver Name

3-42 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define input and output, and relationship parameters for CAE packages

Descriptor Type Naming Item attributes Revision attributes

pattern

Value: 000087 Value: NXNastran

d. In the Naming Pattern column, enter a naming pattern.

The output naming pattern supports any of the following or a combination of the following:

• Constant string enclosed in double quotes

• INPUTNAME or INPUTID keyword

Note:
Alternatively, you can use any combination of a constant string enclosed in double
quotes, INPUTNAME, or INPUTID keyword.

As an example, if you want to use a CAE prefix, the naming pattern is “CAE-”INPUTNAME.

e. In the Item Attributes column, click the icon to the right of the column to open the Define
Attribute dialog box. Click the Add button to add parameters. In the Attribute Name column,
select an attribute name (for example, Name) and enter the value in the Value column.

f. In the Revision Attributes column, click the icon to the right of the column to open the
Define Attribute dialog box. Click the Add button to add parameters. In the Attribute Name
column, select an attribute name (for example, Revision) and enter the value in the Value
column.

g. Click the Apply button.

9. Define dataset parameters.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-43
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

a. Click the Dataset Configuration tab, and click the Add button to add parameters.

b. In the Descriptor column, choose a default value.

This list contains all output items defined in the Output Configuration pane.

c. To add a dataset, click the Dataset Name column. Select a dataset from the Home view and
click the Add Dataset option. Alternatively, click the Search icon in the column and search for
a dataset.

d. In the Type column, select a dataset type, for example, CAEMesh.

e. In the Copy/Reference column, select Copy or Reference to allow analysts to copy or

reference existing datasets as part of output objects, respectively.

f. In the Naming Pattern column, enter a naming pattern.

Tip:
You can create multiple dataset naming patterns.

The naming pattern supports one of these or any combination of these:

• Constant string enclosed in double quotes

• ITEMREVID keyword
The item revision ID applied here is the item revision ID of the object to which the dataset is
going to be attached.

g. From the Relationship column, select the relevant option.

h. Click the Apply button.

Example:

Descriptor Dataset Type Copy/ Naming Relationship

Name Reference pattern

model_output dataset_- CAEMesh Copy “CAE-”- IMAN_based_on or

name1 ITEMREVID NX Simulations

sim_output dataset_- CAE- Reference “CAE-”- CAE Target

name2 AnalysisDS ITEMREVID Relationship

10. (Optional) Define relationship parameters.

You can specify Generic Relationship Management (GRM) rules to apply constraints on the
relationship between two business objects. A GRM rule applies constraints on the relationship
between two business objects. When you create a GRM rule, you select the primary and secondary

3-44 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define input and output, and relationship parameters for CAE packages

business objects for the relationship, the relationship they have to one another, and the constraints
to be applied.

a. Click the Relationship Configuration tab, and click the Add button to add parameters.

b. From the Primary Object, Relationship and Secondary Object columns, select appropriate
options.
All the descriptors you created are available for selection in the Primary Object and
Secondary Object columns.
The Relationship column provides a list of values and displays the available relationships for
the primary object.
Example:

Primary object Relationship Secondary object

model_output CAE Target Relationship my_part (ItemRevision type)

sim_output CAE Defining Relationship model_output

Note:
You can have relationships between output and input, output and output, or input and
output. However, you cannot have a relationship between input and input or the same
descriptor as primary object and secondary object.

c. Click the Apply button to apply your data.

11. (Optional) Configure BOM view revisions.

A BVR is a workspace object that stores the single-level assembly structure of an item revision.
When you add a component to an assembly, you create an occurrence of that item or item revision
in the assembly, which is stored on the BVR. This occurrence is displayed as a BOM line. A BVR is a
single-level structure that contains occurrences of its immediate children. A multilevel structure is
constructed from several single-line BVRs. Any modification to the product structure (including
changing any of the occurrence attributes or adding a substitute) changes the BVR of the parent
assembly.

a. Click the BVR Configuration tab.

b. In the Parent Descriptor Table area, click the Add button to add parent descriptors.

c. From the Parent Descriptor and Relation columns, select appropriate options.
The Parent Descriptor list contains all input and output descriptors you have defined in the
Input Configuration and Output Configuration panes.

d. In the Child Descriptor Table area, click the Add button to add child descriptors.

12. Click OK to save and exit the CAE Package Configuration dialog box.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-45
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Modify style sheets for CAE packages

Analysts can open CAE packages from the Create CAE Packages wizard by choosing File→New→CAE
Package. You can modify style sheets to add a link for analysts to open this wizard from the Summary
pane of item revisions for frequently used CAE packages.

1. In My Teamcenter, type BaseItemRevSummary in the search menu at the top of the navigation
pane, select Dataset Name, and click Perform Search.

Tip:
The ItemRevision.SUMMARYRENDERING preference controls the dataset used for rendering
an item revision in the graphical user interface (GUI). You can use another dataset by
changing the value of this preference to the name of that dataset.

2. In the Viewer pane, add the following command action key and parameter value in the first
section titled tc_xrt_actions:
Example:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_actions" commandLayout="vertical">

<command actionKey = "copyAction" commandId = "com.teamcenter.rac.copy"/>
<command actionKey = "reviseAction" commandId =
"com.teamcenter.rac.revise"/>
<command actionKey = "saveAsAction" commandId =
"org.eclipse.ui.file.saveAs"/>
<command actionKey = "newProcessAction" titleKey = "tc_xrt_newProc"
commandId = "com.teamcenter.rac.newProcess"/>

<! -- Add a link to open Create CAE Packages wizard -->

<command actionKey="openCAEPackageAction"
commandId="com.teamcenter.rac.tcsim.commands.opencaepackage"
title="Package_Name">
<parameter value="Package_Name"
name="com.teamcenter.rac.tcsim.OpenCAEPackage"/>
</command>
</section>

3. Replace Package_Name with the name of the package for which you want to modify style sheets.

4. Click Apply.

3-46 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define derivative rules and variant configuration rules

Configure rules to derive structures

Define derivative rules and variant configuration rules

You (as a simulation administrator) can create derivative rules and variant configuration rules to allow
analysts to derive one or more structures from an existing structure.

During the virtual validation of a vehicle, simulation analysts may create hundreds of different deck
structures or simulation variants to understand the effects of different materials or to optimize the
weight of the vehicle. This is done by varying the load cases, materials, thickness, meshes, or geometry
and then generating results to validate the vehicle against these different load cases. Many variants are
created for this purpose, with each variant representing a load case.

Analysts can use predefined derivative rules and variant configuration rules to quickly derive one or
more simulation variants from an existing one. They can then make modifications to the structure by
varying load cases, meshes, or materials to evaluate different options and view the complete traceability
between the different variants.

Note:
Derivative rules and variant configuration rules are defined at the site level by a user with DBA
privileges, at the group level by the group administrator, and at the user level by the analyst.

Derivative rules

A derivative rule contains filter, skip, and clone rules to indicate which components of the source CAE
structure are used to create a derived CAE structure.

Each rule may contain a conditional clause limiting the rule to a specific item or item revision types. The
conditional clauses may contain expressions based on items, item revisions, or form attribute values.
You can define any number of conditional clauses for each derivative rule. Each conditional clause is
evaluated against each component in the source CAE structure. If components:

• Satisfy the conditional clauses, the system filters, skips, or clones the components in the derived CAE
structure.

• Do not satisfy the conditional clauses, the system directly references the components, along with
their children (if any), in the derived CAE structure.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-47
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Variant configuration rules

A variant configuration rule contains variant options and values to indicate which components of the
source structure are used to create a derived structure.

Consider the source structure as an unconfigured product structure (150% BOM) with a V8 or V6 engine,
an automatic or a manual gearbox, and 2 door or 4 door options. You can define a variant configuration
rule to allow analysts to derive two specific structures using the same rule: one for the V8 engine,
automatic gearbox, and 4 door combination and another for the V6 engine, manual gearbox, and 2 door
combination.

You can specify the configuration details for the above example as follows:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?>

<DERIVATIVE_VARIANT_CONFIG>

<CONFIGURATION>
<DESCRIPTION>V8, automatic, and 4 door vehicle</DESCRIPTION>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="Engine" VALUE="V8"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="Gearbox" VALUE="Automatic"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="Door" VALUE="4"/>
</CONFIGURATION>

<CONFIGURATION>
<DESCRIPTION>V6, manual, and 2 door vehicle</DESCRIPTION>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="Engine" VALUE="V6"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="Gearbox" VALUE="Manual"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="Door" VALUE="2"/>
</CONFIGURATION>

3-48 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Specify a folder location and naming pattern for derived structures

</DERIVATIVE_VARIANT_CONFIG>

Each variant option in the configuration details contains a value limiting the rule to derive a structure
containing only those values. The analyst can override these values or add additional values while
deriving a structure.

Specify a folder location and naming pattern for derived structures

1. In Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE→Derive.

3. (Optional) To specify a different folder for storing the derived structures, choose Alternate Folder
and click Search to search and select an alternate folder.

4. To create a derivative log, select the Persist Derivative Log check box.

5. Specify the derivative log content scope by selecting the Summary or Detailed option.
The CAE_derivation_log_content_scope preference determines whether the derivation log is a
detailed log or a summary log.

6. To copy output objects as items or item revisions in the selected output folder (created in the
earlier step), select Item or Item Revision.
The CAE_derivative_paste_output_options preference determines the configured value. If this
preference is set to:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-49
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Item, the system pastes the output items to the configured output folder.

• Item Revision, the system pastes the output item revisions to the configured output folder.

7. Specify a naming pattern for derived structures.

You can specify a name pattern as a combination of fixed strings in double quotes and keywords.
The valid keywords are BASENAME, which corresponds to the base name specified by the
simulation analyst in the Derive CAE Structure dialog box before the execution, and N for digit.
The pattern you specify must contain both keywords only once. You can optionally specify fixed
strings and they can appear more than once in double quotes.
Examples:
BASENAME"-Deck"NNNN
NNN"-"BASENAME"-Deck"
NNNN"-"BASENAME
The default value is BASENAME"-"NNNN.
Consider the following while specifying a naming pattern:

• No blank values or blank spaces in the pattern string that are not within quotes.

• No leading or trailing white spaces.

Configure the derivative rule

Specify a name and define the output structure configuration

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Derivative Rules
Configuration .

2. Select the Site, Group, or User scope option.

3. In the Derivative Rules Configuration view, click the Create New Derivative Rule view bar
icon.

4. To assign an ID, click Assign in the ID box of the Create Derivative Rule dialog box.

5. To assign a revision number, click Assign in the Revision box.

6. To specify a derivative rule name, type a unique name in the Name box.

3-50 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Specify a name and define the output structure configuration

7. (Optional) Type a description in the Description box.

8. Select the General tab.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-51
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

9. For Name Control Options, you can select Show All Options or Show Only.

• Show All Options shows all available options.

This is the default option if you have migrated derivative rules from a previous version of
Teamcenter and imported them to a new environment by running the
cae_migrate_configurations utility.

• Based on Configured Name Pattern - Starting Number allows analysts to generate derived
structures using a starting number or override it while deriving structures.

• Based on Configured Name Pattern - Unique Auto-generated Number allows analysts to

generate derived structures by using a unique and automatically generated number or override
it while deriving structures.
For example, if an analyst specifies the BASENAME as SV01 and selects the unique
autogenerated option, the system generates the next unique number, 0001, and computes the
name based on the specified base name, for example, SV01-Deck0001.

• Based on Configured Name Pattern - Fixed Name allows analysts to generate derived
structures using a fixed name or override it while deriving structures.

3-52 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Add filter, skip, and clone rules

10. Specify the output structure configuration by selecting the Precise At All Levels or Inherited From
Source option.
When an analyst derives a CAE structure from another structure, the system retains the precise or
imprecise rules specified in the selected clone rule set definition. If the clone rule set definition is
set to:

• Precise At All Levels: Every cloned assembly or subassembly in the derived CAE structure is set
to precise.

• Inherited From Source: Every cloned assembly or subassembly in the derived CAE structure is
set to the same state (precise or imprecise) as its corresponding object in the source structure.

Note:
When a child component of a cloned subassembly is referenced, the derived subassembly
includes the revision of the child component based on the precision setting of the source
subassembly and the active revision rule.

11. Enter additional item creation information by selecting the Create related CAE Analysis Items and
the Create related CAE Result Items options.

12. Select a domain from the Select Domain list.

13. To save the derivative rule, click Save in the view toolbar.

14. Select the Rules tab and create a Filter, Skip, or Clone rule.

Add filter, skip, and clone rules

You can create a derivative rule to indicate which components of the source CAE structure to use to
create a derived CAE structure. The derivative rule consists of the following rules:

• Filter rule identifies the components and their children you want to filter in the derived structure.

• Skip rule skips any level in a structure. This rule skips one level of the structure while continuing to
process any children of the identified level of the structure.

• Clone rule duplicates a structure.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose the Derivative Rules
Configuration toolbar icon.

2. Select a derivative rule you have created and click the Rules tab.

3. From the Rules list, select Filter, Skip, or Clone and click Add .

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-53
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

4. In the Rule Builder dialog box, specify a rule name in the Rule Name box.

5. (Optional) Specify a description in the Description box.

6. Select appropriate options in the Class, Types, and Attributes lists.

7. Perform the following steps to create a conditional expression:

• Select an attribute.

• Select the Item, Item Revision, or Form class from the Class list, for example, ItemRevision.

• Select the required type from the Types list, for example, CAEModelRevision.

• Select the required attribute from the Attributes list, for example, Name.

• Define a conditional expression.

3-54 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Create derivative variant configuration

• Select the required XSLT function in the XSLT Function tree.

An XSLT function is required to create a conditional expression that has a primary return type
such as String, Number, or Boolean. Examples include Boolean and Equal.

• Drag the selected XSLT function in the pane next to the XSLT Function tree.

• Provide values for the XSLT function in one of the following ways:

■ Type static values in the parameter box.

■ Drag the required attributes in the parameter box.

■ Select an XSLT function from the XSLT Function tree and drag it in the parameter box.
For example, drag the Name attribute to the L.H.S box and type c1 in the R.H.S box.
Here c1 represents the name of the item type you want to filter, skip, or clone.

• Click the button and the button to add the rule condition to the set of conditions.

You can also use the Edit button to edit a rule condition, the Delete button to remove a rule
condition, or the Clear button to clear all rule conditions.

8. To create another rule, repeat steps 3-7.

9. To create the derivative rule, click Finish.

Create derivative variant configuration

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and click Derivative Rules
Configuration .

2. Select the Variant Configurations tab.

3. Select the Site, Group, or User scope option.

4. In the Derivative Rules Configuration view, click the Create view bar icon.

5. To assign an ID, click Assign in ID box of the Create Derivative Variant Configuration dialog box.

6. To assign a revision number, click Assign in the Revision box.

7. To specify a rule name, type a unique name in the Name box.

8. (Optional) Type a description in the Description box.

9. Click OK.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-55
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

10. In the Configuration Details box, specify a configuration in XML format.

To view or copy a sample configuration, see the TC_DATA\CAEDerivativeVariantConfig.xml file.
Example:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?>

<!--
For a master deck that has 3 variants options configured on the root -
01_Market, 02_BodyStyle , 03_Engine and 04_Roof -
the following Derivative Variant Configuration will create 3 derived
decks as follows:
1. Vehicle configuration for European market with 3 doors,
V6 engine and sunroof
2. Vehicle configuration for Asia Pacific's market with 4 doors,
V6 engine and standard roof
3. Vehicle configuration for American market with 3 doors,
V4 engine and sunroof
-->
<DERIVATIVE_VARIANT_CONFIG>
<CONFIGURATION>
<DESCRIPTION>Deck1 representing Europe vehicle configuration</
DESCRIPTION>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="01_Market" VALUE="EU"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="02_BodyStyle" VALUE="3DR"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="03_Engine" VALUE="V6"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="04_Roof" VALUE="Sun"/>
</CONFIGURATION>
<CONFIGURATION>
<DESCRIPTION>Deck2 representing Asia-Pacific vehicle
configuration</DESCRIPTION>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="01_Market" VALUE="APAC"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="02_BodyStyle" VALUE="4DR"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="03_Engine" VALUE="V6"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="04_Roof" VALUE="Standard"/>
</CONFIGURATION>
<CONFIGURATION>
<DESCRIPTION>Deck3 representing USA vehicle configuration</DESCRIPTION>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="01_Market" VALUE="USA"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="02_BodyStyle" VALUE="3DR"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="03_Engine" VALUE="V4"/>
<VARIANT_OPTION NAME="04_Roof" VALUE="Sun"/>
</CONFIGURATION>
</DERIVATIVE_VARIANT_CONFIG>

11. To save this rule, click the Save view bar icon.

3-56 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure relationship types

Configure relationship types for model and analysis item revisions

Configure relationship types

In a complex product development environment, different analysts perform different tasks in the overall
analysis. For example, abstractions are delivered by one group, model builds by another group, load
cases defined by another group, and solver ready decks are built by another group. In such scenarios, it
becomes critical to know whether analysis data, with possibly multiple dependencies, is out of date. The
analyst can then act on it and ensure that the analysis is built with the correct set of data to deliver
accurate results.

In CAE Manager, analysts can check for later revisions of item revisions attached to CAE Model or CAE
Analysis item revisions. They can also check for changes to any attachments of CAE Model or CAE
Analysis item revisions in the Attachments view.

When analysts perform these checks, the simulation administrator can configure Simulation Process
Management to consider only those objects attached via relation types that are significant for the
company’s business model. The simulation administrator can create significant relation types for CAE
Model and CAE Analysis item revisions. These significant relation types are different for CAE Model
and CAE Analysis item revisions. However, a significant relation type for the CAE Model item revision,
for example, applies to all its subtypes.

Note:
The significant relation type is a site-wide configuration set by a simulation administrator and it
cannot be overridden by an analyst.

The process is as follows:

• At a site, the simulation administrator configures significant relationship types for CAE Model and
CAE Analysis item revisions and its subtypes.

• The analyst, checks for changes to CAE Model and CAE Analysis item revisions and marks them as up
to date.

To define relationship types, the administrator can use the following preferences:

• CAE_significant_relation_types_for_CAEModel to define relationship types for the CAE Model item

revision and its subtypes.
• CAE_significant_relation_types_for_CAEAnalysis to define relationship types for the CAE Analysis
item revision and its subtypes.

1. In CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→General.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-57
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

3. Create signification relationship types for CAE Model item revisions.

a. Click the Out-of-date Significant Relations tab.

b. (Optional) Select a relationship type for CAE Model from the menu and click the Add button
to add the relationship type to Significant Relationship Types for CAE Model list.

c. (Optional) Click the Remove button to remove a relationship type from the Significant
Relationship Types for CAE Model list.

4. Create signification relationship types for CAE Analysis item revisions.

a. Click the Out-of-date Significant Relations tab.

b. (Optional) Select a relationship type for CAE Analysis from the menu and click the Add
button to add the relationship type to the Significant Relationship Types for CAE Analysis
list.

c. (Optional) Click the Remove button to remove a relationship type from the Significant
Relationship Types for CAE Analysis list.

Configure highlight colors

The highlight colors you configure are applied when using highlighting in the CAE Manager secondary
views.

1. In CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→General.

3. Click the Out-of-date Highlights tab.

4. Choose an appropriate color option for Action, Caution, No Action and Out of Scope options.

• Action — Indicates that an action is needed on an object. (The default color is red.)

• Caution — Indicates that caution is needed on an object. (The default color is yellow.)

• No Action — Indicates that no action is needed on an object. (The default color is green.)

• Out of Scope — Indicates that an object is not considered by the operation. (The default color is
gray.)

3-58 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Enable pedigree operations and specify model and analysis relations

Capture the exact configuration of product and model structures

Enable pedigree operations and specify model and analysis relations

You can enable or disable pedigree-related commands using the Enable Pedigree Operations option.
This option is stored as the CAE_enable_pedigree_operations preference in the database. You can set
this preference at the Site, Role, Group, or User level. By default, this preference is set to true at the
User level.

You can also specify valid relation types for model and analysis objects and all their subtypes.

1. In CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options.

2. In the Options dialog box, choose CAE Tools→General, and click the Pedigree Operations tab.

3. (Optional) Clear the Enable Pedigree Operations check box to disable pedigree options. This
option is selected by default.

4. Specify the valid relation types for Model Relations.

These relationships are applicable to model objects and all their subtypes. The system follows the
specified relationships in capturing the pedigree. You can optionally specify custom relations.
This option is stored as the CAE_pedigree_model_relationships preference in the database. You
can set this preference at the Site or Group level. By default, this preference is set to
TC_CAE_Target or CAE Target Relationship at the Site level.

5. Specify the valid relation types for Analysis Relations.

These relationships are applicable to analysis objects and all their subtypes. The system follows the
specified relationships in capturing the pedigree. You can optionally specify custom relations.
This option is stored as the CAE_pedigree_analysis_relationships preference in the database. You
can set this preference at the Site or Group level. By default, this preference is set to
TC_CAE_Target or CAE Target Relationship and TC_CAE_Defining or CAE Defining Relationship
at the Site level.

Configure simulation tools to launch preprocessors, solvers, and

postprocessors

Configuring simulation tools

Simulation Process Management provides a framework for configuring and launching simulation tools
that can include preprocessors, solvers, postprocessors, and other tools to perform custom actions. It
allows you to:

• Define and organize specific tools to gather process inputs.

• Create Teamcenter objects to hold tool output.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-59
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Import tool output into Teamcenter.

• Configure a simulation tool to specify an object (item, item revision, or dataset) in the data model as
the object to hold the output data files.

• Define rules to navigate from the primary input object to the output object through a combination of
relationships where the originating item revision is either the primary or secondary object of the
relationship.

• Define a naming pattern for each of the objects (item, item revision, or dataset) that are created
during the tool launch.

Note:
Only the simulation administrator or a user with DBA privileges can configure simulation
processes.

After the simulation administrator configures the simulation tools, analysts can run the tools from the
Teamcenter rich client on their desktops and place the tool output in Teamcenter upon completion.

Analysts can launch simulation tools as a local launch, local detached launch, remote launch, or server
launch, depending on how you configure launch parameters at your site. Simulation Process
Management uses Dispatcher Server components to launch external simulation tools as a local detached
launch, remote launch, or server launch.

Note:
Dispatcher Server components are not required for the local launch option.

The Dispatcher Server provides a generic framework to support data translation, which includes:

• Triggering of translations.

• Extraction of data from Teamcenter for translator input.

• Translation of the data.

• Storage of translation results in Teamcenter.

• Management of translation requests.

Prerequisites for simulation tool launch dialog box

A Web browser is a prerequisite for simulation tool launch dialog box.

3-60 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define the dataset name to store simulation tool configurations

On Windows systems, Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox browsers are supported. On Linux
systems, Mozilla Firefox is supported. On Macintosh systems, Safari browsers are supported.

Note:
To display the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box on the Linux platform, you must set the
MOZILLA_FIVE_HOME environment variable to point to the /usr/bin/firebox/ directory, and then
prepend this directory to the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable.

For information about certified browser versions, see the Hardware and Software Certifications
knowledge base article on Support Center.

Define the dataset name to store simulation tool configurations

A user with DBA privileges must configure the CAE_simulation_tool_config_dsname preference, and
the simulation administrator must have write access to the indicated dataset. If no such dataset exists, it
is created the first time a privileged user (dba or a simulation administrator) saves a simulation tool
configuration.

The simulation tool configuration file is managed in a TCCAESimToolConfig102009 dataset indicated

by the CAE_simulation_tool_config_dsname preference.

Set preferences to automatically clear simulation jobs

You can set the following preferences to automatically clear simulation jobs when a simulation analyst
uses simulation tools in CAE Manager or Active Workspace:

• CAE_Jobs_Clear_After_Size

• CAE_Jobs_Clear_Batch_Size

Configure the user and shared staging locations for simulation tools

The simulation tool launch framework uses the default scratch location as the directory to store all the
input and output files. However, if the user staging location is configured, the tool launch uses the user
staging location as the directory for storing all the input and output files for the Local Launch and
Server Launch options.

In addition, a shared staging location can be configured at the site, group, and user level. This is done to
avoid exporting the same result files across simulation tools by multiple users. These result files can also
be easily shared across multiple users.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-61
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

During tool launch, the system provides the path to the User Staging Directory and the Shared Staging
Directory to the launch script. The system exports or imports the required files from the User Staging
Directory. The launch script uses the configured Shared Staging Directory path to copy the files.

1. In Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. To enable or disable the context-based menu, specify favorite simulation tools, or add simulation
tools to the toolbar, and choose CAE Tools→Simulation Tools.

3. To set the root item of a simulation tool configuration, in the CAE Tool Configuration Root box,
click the Search icon, choose CAE Simulation Tool from the Type menu, and execute the search to
find the simulation tool you want to set as the root.
After you create a simulation tool structure, you can specify the root tool using this option.

4. In the Default Scratch Location box, specify a location for the appropriate operating system. This
defines the temporary location to be used by the simulation tool launch process on the Windows or
the Linux platform.
You can click the Browse button, and select the scratch location.
The tool launch framework uses the default scratch location as the location to store all the input
and output files. However, if the user staging location is configured (see step 5), the tool launch
framework uses the staging location as the location for all input and output files for the Local
Launch and Server Launch options.

5. In the Default User Staging Location box, specify a location for the appropriate operating system.
This defines the user staging location to be used by the simulation tool launch process on the
Windows or the Linux platform.
You can click the Browse button, and select the user staging location.
The default location is determined by the CAE_user_staging_operating_system_location
preference. By default, no location is set for these preferences.

3-62 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure the user and shared staging locations for simulation tools

Note:
This is applicable for server launch only.
Do not use the shared path for the default scratch location and the user staging location.
Instead, use the local path.
Windows services do not support mapped drives. You must use a UNC path or a path that is
local to the machine for the shared staging location.

6. To specify a shared staging location, in the Default Shared Staging Location box, click the Browse
button and select the staging location. You can specify a location at the site, group, and user level
for the appropriate operating system.
The default location is determined by the CAE_shared_staging_operating_system_location
preference. By default, no location is set for these preferences.

7. Specify a folder naming pattern for the shared staging location at the site, group, and user level.
The naming pattern is a combination of fixed strings in double quotation marks and keywords. The
supported keywords are ITEMID, REVID, ITEMREVID, ITEMREVNAME, and REVVERSION.
The fixed strings are optional and they can appear more than once in double quotation marks. You
cannot name the folder name with a character that is not supported by the target file system.
Naming pattern examples:

• * ITEMID"-"ITEMREVNAME
The system evaluates this as 00069-Item.

• * ITEMID"_"REVID"_"REVVERSION"_"ITEMREVNAME
The system evaluates this as 00079_A_1_Item.

The folder naming pattern is based on the CAE_staging_directory_folder_naming_pattern site

preference. By default it is set to ITEMID"_"REVID"_"REVVERSION"_"ITEMREVNAME at the site
level.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-63
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Example:
If you specify C:\Temp as the user staging location and ITEMID_REVID as the folder naming
pattern, the input and output files are available in the following directories:

• Local Launch: C:\Temp\ITEMID_REVID

• Server Launch: C:\Temp\ITEMID_REVID\ID_of_the_Logged_In_User

The system creates a subfolder with the ID of the logged on user in the folder created as
per the naming pattern.

8. To disable the context-based menu for simulation tool launch, clear the Enable Context Based
Menu for Simulation Tool Launch check box. This check box is selected by default.

Note:
The Enable Context Based Menu for Simulation Tool Launch is controlled by a user with
DBA privileges and the check box determines whether a tool is available in the menus based
on whether the selected item revision is valid for that particular tool. If the context-based
menu check box is cleared, analysts can specify input types that do not match the selected
input item revision.

This context based menu is based on the CAE_enable_context_based_menu preference. By

default, the preference is set to true, and this check box is selected by default.

Set favorite simulation tools

1. In Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options→CAE Tools→Simulation Tools.

2. To add simulation tools to the Simulation Tools toolbar in CAE Manager, select the configured
tools from the following sections:

• Favorite Released Simulation Tools: Defines the simulation tools configured as favorite tools to
appear in the Simulation Tools → Favorite Tools menu in CAE Manager.
After the simulation administrator configures the simulation tools, analysts can use the
Simulation Tools dialog box to add their simulation tools to the Simulation Tools→Favorite
Tools menu in CAE Manager. The system saves the favorite tools in the
CAE_my_favorite_simulation_tools user level preference irrespective of the role and group of
the user.

• Released Simulation Tools in Toolbar: Defines the simulation tools configured to appear in the
Simulation Tools menu in CAE Manager.
After the simulation administrator configures the simulation tools, analysts can use the
Simulation Tools dialog box to add their simulation tools to the Simulation Tools menu in CAE
Manager. The system saves the favorite tools in the CAE_my_simulation_tools_in_toolbar user
level preference irrespective of the role and group of the user.

3-64 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure server cache for simulation tools using the PLM XML export method

3. Select a revision rule for the simulation tools in the toolbar.

By default, it set to Any Status; No Working based on the CAE_tool_menu_rev_rule user
preference.

Configure server cache for simulation tools using the PLM XML export
method

The Teamcenter administrator can configure the Teamcenter File Management System (FMS) and file
system cache service (FSC) cache such that simulation analysts can launch preconfigured simulation
tools faster. The simulation analyst uses model structures to perform different types of analyses and for
different load cases. Each time a different analysis or a different load case is being performed, the
system fetches the required input files from the Teamcenter database. Moreover, in large organizations,
there are hundreds of simulation analysts who typically perform these different kinds of analyses using
similar kinds of model structures. The Teamcenter administrator can use the server cache and make the
required input files available locally to quicken the tool launch process.

The simulation administrator configures simulation tools including preprocessors, solvers, and
postprocessors. While configuring the tools, the simulation administrator can specify primary input rules
and additional input rules. Both these rules use the file input method or the PLM XML export method to
gather all the required inputs required for the simulation tools. The Teamcenter administrator can
configure the server cache for the PLM XML export method. This configuration is supported for all
simulation launch methods such as local launch, remote launch, and server launch.

Install the standalone cache server

1. Run TEM and in the Solutions panel, select Volume Server.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-65
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

2. In Server Enhancements → File Management, select FMS Server Cache.

3-66 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure server cache for simulation tools using the PLM XML export method

3. In the File System Cache Service (FSC) panel, clear the Enable configuration master check box.

4. Specify the FSC Parent URL value. This specifies the URL to the parent FSC if the current FSC is not
a master.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-67
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

5. Complete the installation.

6. Edit the TC_ROOT\fsc\FSC_Machine_Name_User_Name.xml file and set the

FSC_FilesPerWholeFileCacheDir property value to 1024.

Caution:
File caching does not happen if this is set to zero (0) or as a negative value.

Modify the FMS master configuration file on the Teamcenter server

1. Edit the TC_ROOT\fsc\fmsmaster_FSC_Machine_Name_User_Name.xml file.

Example:

3-68 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure server cache for simulation tools using the PLM XML export method

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<!DOCTYPE fmsworld SYSTEM "fmsmasterconfig.dtd">

<fmsworld>
<fmsenterprise id="-1841327028" volumestate="normal">
<fccdefaults>
<property name="FCC_CacheLocation" value="$HOME/FCCCache|/tmp/
$USER/FCCCache" overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_HashBlockPages" value="6144" overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_LogFile" value="$HOME/fcc.log|/tmp/$USER/fcc.log"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxExtentFileSizeMegabytes" value="256"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxExtentFiles" value="11" overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxReadCacheSize" value="1000M"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxWriteCacheSize" value="1000M"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaximumNumberOfFilePages" value="28672"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaximumNumberOfSegments" value="10688"
overridable="true" />
</fccdefaults>
<fscgroup id="mygroup">
<fsc id="FSC_vc6s004_yytcadm"
address="http://vc6s004.net.plm.eds.com:4544" ismaster="true">
<volume id="00f55d7b4440923f944c" enterpriseid="-1841327028"
root="C:\apps\tc\tc12\TV" priority="0" />
<transientvolume id="8409518771a8915f7f0d8264fd06e68a"
enterpriseid="-1841327028" root="C:\\apps\\tc\\tc12\\TRV" />
</fsc>
<clientmap subnet="127.0.0.1" mask="0.0.0.0">
<assignedfsc fscid="FSC_vc6s004_yytcadm" priority="0" />
</clientmap>
</fscgroup>
</fmsenterprise>
</fmsworld>

Add the cache server configuration to the FMS master configuration. Be sure to include the IP
address of the cache server machine and set the ismaster value to false.

Change as follows:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<!DOCTYPE fmsworld SYSTEM "fmsmasterconfig.dtd">

<fmsworld>
<fmsenterprise id="-1841327028" volumestate="normal">
<fccdefaults>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-69
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<property name="FCC_CacheLocation" value="$HOME/FCCCache|/tmp/

$USER/FCCCache" overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_HashBlockPages" value="6144" overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_LogFile" value="$HOME/fcc.log|/tmp/$USER/fcc.log"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxExtentFileSizeMegabytes" value="256"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxExtentFiles" value="11" overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxReadCacheSize" value="1000M"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaxWriteCacheSize" value="1000M"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaximumNumberOfFilePages" value="28672"
overridable="true" />
<property name="FCC_MaximumNumberOfSegments" value="10688"
overridable="true" />
</fccdefaults>
<fscgroup id="mygroup">
<fsc id="FSC_vc6s004_yytcadm"
address="http://vc6s004.net.plm.eds.com:4544" ismaster="true">
<volume id="00f55d7b4440923f944c" enterpriseid="-1841327028"
root="C:\apps\tc\tc12\TV" priority="0" />
<transientvolume id="8409518771a8915f7f0d8264fd06e68a"
enterpriseid="-1841327028" root="C:\\apps\\tc\\tc12\\TRV" />
</fsc>

<!-- Make the changes for adding the cache server configuration to the
FMS master configuration as follows -->

<fsc id="FSC_vc6s004_yytcadm_1"
address="http:{IP_of_cache_server_machine}:4544" ismaster="false">
<fccdefaults>
<property name="FCC_EnableDirectFSCRouting" value="false"
overridable="false"
</fccdefaults>
</fsc>

<!-- End of changes -->

<clientmap subnet="127.0.0.1" mask="0.0.0.0">

<assignedfsc fscid="FSC_vc6s004_yytcadm" priority="0" />
</clientmap>
</fscgroup>
</fmsenterprise>
</fmsworld>

2. Define the configuration using the nearest FSC for the clients. In the above example, the
clientmap should point to the nearest FSC.

3-70 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure server cache for simulation tools using the PLM XML export method

<clientmap subnet="127.0.0.1" mask="0.0.0.0">

<assignedfsc fscid="FSC_vc6s004_yytcadm" priority="0" />
</clientmap>

3. Save the file.

4. To copy the FMS master configuration file from the Teamcenter server to the standalone cache
server:

a. Restart the Teamcenter FSC service.

b. Restart the FCC service from the TC_ROOT\tccs\bin directory.

Modify the FCC file on the client machine to point to the standalone cache server

1. On the client machine, edit the TC_ROOT\tccs\fcc.xml file.

Example:

<!DOCTYPE fccconfig SYSTEM "fccconfig.dtd">

<!--
bcprt
This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp.
COPYRIGHT 2007 UGS CORP. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ecprt
-->
<fccconfig version="1.3.2">
<fccdefaults>
<!-- general -->
<!-- <property name="FCC_LogFile" value="$HOME\fcc.log|/tmp/$USER/
fcc.log"
overridable="true"/> -->
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
</fccdefaults>
<!-- default parentfsc - this is a marker that will be overwritten
by the installer -->
<parentfsc address="http://vc6s004:4544/" priority="0" />
<assignment mode="clientmap" />
</fccconfig>

2. Edit the parentfsc address property to point the address to the standalone cache server.

3. If FSC cache server is used for Teamcenter Tool Launcher Client on Active Workspace, edit the
Fms_BootStrap_Urls preference value to include a value for the standalone cache server.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-71
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Example:

http://Machine_Name:Port_Number

The values for the machine name and port number are the same as those specified in the step 4.

4. Restart the FCC service from the TC_ROOT\tccs\bin directory.

Define simulation tools

Create a simulation tool

You can configure simulation tools using the Simulation Tool Configuration view. While configuring
simulation tools, you can clone tools, change ownership of selected tools, discard and reset tool
changes, and create tool separator objects.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. To create a simulation tool, click Create Simulation Tool in the view toolbar.
This is the root tool configuration and you can create child tool configurations by selecting the root
tool.
Child tools inherit the values of the parent tool. You can clear the Inherited check box in a child
tool to make configuration changes specific to the child tool.

3. Click Assign in the Simulation Tool ID box to automatically assign an ID.

4. Click Assign in the Simulation Tool Revision box to automatically assign a revision ID.

5. Specify a name in the Simulation Tool Name box.

6. Specify tool-specific information in the tabs in the Simulation Tool Configuration view.

7. To save the simulation tool configuration, click Save Simulation Tool in the view toolbar.

8. (Optional) To create a tool separator object for your child tools, right-click and choose Add Tool
Separator.
You may configure different categories of simulation tools for preprocessors, solvers,
postprocessors, and other tools. You can use tool separators to separate tools while creating
different categories of tools.

Tip:
You cannot create a tool separator for a root tool.

3-72 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure general properties for simulation tool launch

9. (Optional) To change the ownership of a tool object, click Change Ownership of Selected Tool in
the view toolbar, and choose a new owning user.
If a user with DBA privileges creates the root tool and child tools, this user can transfer the
ownership of the child tools to different simulation administrators for creating different categories
of tools.
For example, you might have different simulation administrators for preprocessor, solver, and
postprocessor tools. In such cases, a user with DBA privileges creates a root tool and then creates
child tools for the preprocessor, solver, and postprocessor tools and transfers ownership of these
child tools to the respective simulation administrators. The simulation administrators can then
create multiple tool categories within the child tools.

10. (Optional) To copy all the information from the source tool and to create a new tool by cloning the
source tool, click Clone Simulation Tool in the view toolbar.
When you clone tools, the name of the child tool is the same as that of the source and the new tool
is added as the last child of the parent tool.

11. (Optional) To create a new root simulation tool by removing the current tool tree and to clear the
configuration in all panels, click Clear Simulation Tool Structure in the view toolbar.

12. To release a simulation tool, click Release Simulation Tool.

13. To release all simulation tools, click Release all Tools.

14. To undo the release of a simulation tool (already released), click Unrelease Simulation Tool.

Configure general properties for simulation tool launch

You can configure general properties after you have configured a process in the CAE Manager
application. These include:

• Specifying an icon file for a tool launch and optionally sharing the icon file with more than one
process.

• Specifying a tool launch dialog display file for configured simulation tools. The launch dialog is used
to render the simulation tool launch dialog box for analysts.

• Checking or clearing an option to display or not display the Simulation Tool Progress Monitor dialog
box for analysts to view the status of the tool launch.

• Checking or clearing an option to display or not display the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box. If you
clear this option, the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box is not displayed, and analysts can start the
tool launch directly.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-73
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

2. Click the General tab.

Note:
You must have at least one simulation tool configured to view the General and other tabs for
a simulation process.

3. Specify a help document for generic tools.

Simulation analysts may not be familiar with some generic tools. You, as simulation administrator,
can upload a help document about how to use this tool using the Detail Description Dataset box.
After launching the preconfigured tool, the simulation analyst can open the help related to this tool
and view it.

a. In the Detail Description Dataset box, click the Add button.

b. To add a description file, click the Browse button in the Configure File Description dialog box
and select a file.

c. (Optional) Specify a dataset name.

d. Select the dataset type.

4. To specify an icon file, click the Browse button in the Icon File area.
You can specify an icon file (for example, png or jpeg) and this icon file is shared for more than one
process that you define.
If you specify a full path to the icon file, the system imports the file to the dataset and displays only
the icon file name and not the full path to the icon after you apply the changes. If you specify only
the icon file name, the system assumes that the file already exists in the dataset and does not
import the file.

Note:
All icon files are translated into *.jpg files before being imported into the dataset. Therefore,
to use the same icon file for multiple tools, specify the file with the *.jpg extension.

If you specify a child process and you select the Inherited check box for the child process, the child
process inherits the icon file details of the parent process.

5. To specify a display file for the tool launch dialog, click the Browse button in the Tool Launch
Dialog Display File area and select the file.

6. To display a progress monitor for analysts to view the status of the tool launch, check the Display
Progress Monitor on Launch check box.
If you clear this check box, analysts cannot see the status for the tools they have launched.

7. To display a simulation tool dialog box when an analyst starts a simulation tool launch, check the
Show Launch Simulation Tool Dialog check box.

3-74 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure launch properties to specify a launch method and launch script location

If you clear this check box, the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box is not displayed and analysts
can start the tool directly. This is especially useful for tools that require no additional inputs from
the analyst when starting.

8. To allow analysts to select inputs from multiple views, select the Allow Input Selection from
Multiple Views check box.
By default, analysts can select inputs only from a single active view.

Configure launch properties to specify a launch method and launch script location

You can use the Launch Properties tab to specify a launch method (local, local detached, remote, or
server), specify a system temporary location for different launch tools or categories, and specify a
launch script location.

You can set up a scratch location with different directories for different tools or categories, and this is
especially useful when you have to specify a network directory location for a particular tool. The scratch
location you specify is the category or tool level directory for all named references of datasets, datasets
associated with item revisions, or item revisions created by Teamcenter.

You specify a scratch location at the root level while configuring a process. While creating sub tools or
categories, the system uses the root scratch location if you do not separately specify a scratch location at
the sub tools or category level.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Launch Properties tab.

3. Specify a launch method.

Option Requires Allows analysts to

Teamcenter
Dispatcher?

Local Launch No Launch simulation tools on Teamcenter clients.

The analyst must keep the Teamcenter client running until
the simulation process is completed.

Local Detached Yes Launch simulation tools on Teamcenter clients.

Launch
The analyst can exit the Teamcenter client after launching
the simulation process. The results are stored in Teamcenter.

Remote Launch Yes Launch simulation tools on a different machine or module.

This machine does not have the Teamcenter server installed
on it. However, it has simulation tools and Dispatcher

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-75
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Option Requires Allows analysts to

Teamcenter
Dispatcher?

components installed and configured to allow remote launch

of simulation tools from Teamcenter clients.
Remote launch is ideal for compute-intensive operations,
such as meshing, solve execution, and post processing. Such
operations do not require interactive user input and analysts
can execute them as a batch process on remote machines
with load balancing capability and the ability to monitor and
administer request queues.
When you launch simulation tools, the system exports the
data (primary input and additional input files) to the
Dispatcher staging directory.
After launching simulation tools on a different module, the
analyst can exit the Teamcenter client or even shut down the
Teamcenter client. The results are stored in Teamcenter.

Server Launch Yes Launch simulation tools on the Teamcenter server.

After launching simulation tools on the server, the analyst
can exit the Teamcenter client or even shut down the
Teamcenter client. The results are stored in Teamcenter.

Note:
For a remote launch, the tool name must match the service attribute name in the
translator.xml file on the module from which you want to launch the remote tool.

4. Specify the default scratch location.

The tool launch framework uses the default scratch location as the location to store all the input
and output files. However, if the user staging location is configured (see step 7), the tool launch
framework uses the staging location as the location for all input and output files for the Local
Launch and Server Launch options.
To specify the default scratch location at the category or tool level, select the appropriate operating
system, click the Browse button, and select a location.

Note:
This is applicable for server launch only.
Do not use the shared path for the default scratch location and the user staging location.
Instead, use the local path.
Windows services do not support mapped drives. You must use a UNC path or a path that is
local to the machine for the shared staging location.

3-76 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure launch properties to specify a launch method and launch script location

If the Dispatcher module is installed on:

• Linux: Linux and Windows platform must be the same as the Linux path.

• Windows: Linux and Windows platform must be the same as the Windows path.

5. Specify a launch script location.

You can specify both the System File Path and the Item Revision and Dataset Specification
options. For both these options, if the Dispatcher module is installed on:

• Linux: Linux and Windows platform must be the same as the Linux path.

• Windows: Linux and Windows platform must be the same as the Windows path.

a. To specify the location of the launch script, select System File Path, click the cell in the Path
column for the appropriate operating system, and click Browse to choose the launch script.

Note:
Specify the path for the launch script in the field representing the operating system. The
syntax of the path must be consistent with the operating system of the configured
Dispatcher module. The system file path examples are as follows:

• Linux: /usr/scripts/launch_nxnastran.bat

• Windows: C:\scripts\launch_nxnastran.bat

Sample startup scripts to launch tools are available in the

CAE_ESP_Sample_Startup_Scripts.zip file in the TC_DATA directory. You can use these
sample scripts to create your own startup scripts to launch tools and specify other
parameters as appropriate.

b. Create an item in Teamcenter and include a dataset to hold your launch script.
You cannot upload the script file with the .bat file extension directly on a dataset. You can
remove this restriction from the dataset using Business Modeler IDE.

Tip:
As a work around, upload any text file to the dataset and check in the dataset. Then,
check out the dataset, rename the named reference to .bat, and check in the dataset.

c. To select a dataset for the tool launch:

1. Select Dataset Specification, click the cell in the Path column for the appropriate
operating system, and click Browse to choose the launch script.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-77
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

2. In the Search dialog box, search for an item revision and select a dataset from the
Folders list.

3. In the Selected Dataset box, click the Add button to add the selected dataset.

This is the same item revision and dataset you created in the previous step.

4. Click OK in the Search dialog box to add the item revision and dataset information in the
respective columns.

6. (Optional) Select the Use Parameter File check box to create an ASCII text file in the working
directory that contains all the command line arguments. Pass this file name as an argument to the
launch script rather than the individual parameters. This option is useful when the argument list to
the script is very lengthy.

7. Select the Use Staging Directory check box to use shared locations.
The staging directories are configured in the Options dialog box in Teamcenter or CAE Manager.
This is supported only for the Local Launch and Server Launch options.

Remove the file restriction from the dataset using the Business Modeler IDE

Only a DBA can perform the following procedures.

1. Start the Business Modeler IDE.

2. In the Business Objects folder, right-click the business object and choose Open.
The constant appears in the Business Object Constants table on the Main tab.

3. In the Business Object Constants table, select the Fnd0DatasetFileExtensionRestric constant

and click the Edit button.

4. In the Modify Business Object Constant dialog box, remove the .bat value from the Value box.

3-78 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure environment variables for the tool launch script

5. Click Finish.

6. To save the changes to the data model, choose BMIDE→Save Data Model, or click the Save Data
Model button on the main toolbar.

7. Deploy the data model changes.

Configure environment variables for the tool launch script

You can use the Environment Variables pane to define a set of environment variables and their
associated values used for launching the script configured for the tool.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Environment Variables tab.

3. In the Environment Variables pane, click the Add button, enter an environment variable name,
and add the appropriate platform value (Windows or Linux) of the CAE authoring tool.
If the Dispatcher module is installed on:

• Linux: Linux and Windows platform must be the same as the Linux path.

• Windows: Linux and Windows platform must be the same as the Windows path.

Example:

• Name: SPLM_LICENSE_SERVER

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-79
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Windows Platform Value: 28000@hostname

Define input types and create input rules for the tool launch process

Define input types

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Input Configuration tab.

3. In the Minimum Input and Maximum Input boxes, type the minimum and maximum number of
item revisions the process can accept as input.

4. Select a launch type.

• Single Launch option to launch a single process regardless of the number of item revisions the
user selects for input. Teamcenter passes a list of the selected item revisions to the process being
launched.
Select this option if analysts want to run the CAE BOM Compare report. This is useful for
comparing files available in the same working directory. The Multiple Launch option exports
files to different working directory for each input selected by the analyst and is not
recommended for the launch of comparison tools.
If you select this option, the simulation analyst can override the User Staging Location box in
the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box.

• Multiple Launch option to launch multiple processes.

For multiple processes, one process is selected for each item revision when the process is
launched.

Note:
This option is applicable only if the Maximum Input value is greater than one.

If you select this option, the simulation analyst cannot override the User Staging Location box
in the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box.

5. Specify a primary input type.

You can choose item revision types, datasets, or folders. You cannot configure a combination of
these object types.
The primary input types you include here are added to the primary type row options in the
Traversal Path table for creating primary input rules and additional input rules.
You can specify multiple dataset types or folder types as a primary input for a single simulation
tool.
If you choose datasets or folders, you cannot choose the File Input option and create traversal
rules or define additional input rules using the file input method.

3-80 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define input types

6. Specify a primary input rule.

You can create multiple primary input rules to download the named references of an item revision.
Teamcenter evaluates the rules in the order listed. The first rule satisfied by locating an appropriate
input file is chosen for the launch script and no more rules are evaluated. For example, you can
create a rule for a primary item type such as CAEAnalysisRevision by defining a traversal path
from the item revision to the solver-specific data deck (CAESolver) and from CAESolver to the file
to be exported. Each of the rules, defined as primary input rules, is executed when the process is
launched until a corresponding file is found. After a corresponding file is found, all remaining rules
are ignored. Additionally, the file name is passed to the launch script as a parameter.
You can define a primary input rule using the file input method or PLM XML export method.

Note:
You can add any number of File Input rules or PLMXML Export rules, but not both types of
rules together.
After you create file input rules, you can select multiple rules, copy, and paste them in the
File Output box in the Output Configuration tab.

7. Specify an additional input rule.

You can optionally create additional input rules to download named references of related item
revisions to the temp directory. All of the rules, defined as additional input rules, are executed
when the process is launched and all corresponding files are placed in the temp directory.
You can define an additional input rule using the file input method or PLM XML export method.

8. Specify optional inputs.

While running preconfigured simulation tools, you (as a simulation administrator) cannot
practically link all the optional inputs to the primary input item revision and predefine the traversal
path for all the inputs that the simulation analyst wants to export in the tool configuration. For
example, in addition to the results file (primary input), the simulation analyst may want to select
results templates (optional inputs) and send them to a post processor. The results templates are
not linked to the analysis item revision that holds the results file. In such cases, the simulation
administrator can configure optional inputs to allow simulation analysts to select additional inputs
such as results templates.
The simulation administrator can configure item revisions for each optional input, the default
value, the export directory, and the availability of the optional input in the Launch Simulation Tool
dialog box by setting the visible value to true.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-81
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

During the tool launch process, the simulation analyst can select the desired item revision for each
available optional input and use these templates to export only specific types of results.

If you want to configure style sheets for simulation tools launch, the
SampleLaunchSimToolDialogHTML.html sample HTML file includes the Optional Inputs section.

a. Click the Add button in the Optional Inputs area.

b. Type a description for the optional input.

The description you specify is displayed in the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box.

c. Select an item revision type.

You can select only the specified type or any of its subtypes.

d. To specify a default value for the optional input, click the Browse button in the Default Value
column and specify the search criteria.
You can specify only objects of the selected item revision type or any of its subtypes (previous
step).

e. Specify an export directory for creating a directory within the ESP directory. For example, if
you specify a Results Template directory, the system exports all the files under each optional
input item revision to the ESP\Results Template directory.

3-82 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define a primary input rule using the file input method

You can use the same directory for multiple optional inputs. If you do not specify a directory,
the system exports the files to the ESP directory.

f. To make this optional input item revision available in the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box,
select true or false in the Visible column.
If you set it to false, the optional input is not displayed in the Launch Simulation Tool dialog
box, but the system continues to export files from the configured item revision with the
default value.

Define a primary input rule using the file input method

You can use the File Input option to:

• Specify an input rule (using a traversal rule) and specify dataset name patterns and file name patterns
for the input.

• Define a relationship type at each step of the traversal rule to traverse to the next object if the
secondary object is an item revision.

• Specify an input type and a file naming pattern for the input type.

• Create web link definitions to the result files in a shared network folder.
In some cases, instead of storing large result files in the database, organizations prefer storing the
generated result files on shared network folders. In such cases, the simulation administrator
configures input rules for the system to create web links to the shared network folders.

1. Select the File Input option in the Primary Input box.

2. Click the Add button to open the Primary Input Details dialog box.

3. In the Rule Name box, type a rule name.

4. In the Traversal Path table, click the Add button to add a row and activate all options.

5. In the Originating Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option. For example, select
an item revision class such as CAE Model Revision.
The primary type options available here depend on the input types you have added in the Primary
Input Type box.

6. In the Relation column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

7. In the Destination Object column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

8. In the Relation Direction column, click a cell and choose the appropriate option.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-83
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Note:
This option is available only if you choose the Item Revision option in the Destination
Object column.

• Primary to Secondary indicates the path from an item revision to another and that the
origination item revision is the primary contributor to the relationship.

• Secondary to Primary indicates the path from an item revision to another and that the
secondary item revision class is the primary contributor to the relationship.

9. In the Destination Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option. The options available
here depend on the Destination Object type you have chosen in step 7.
The Destination Type column, depending on the choices you have made in the previous columns,
includes the file extension type in the menu and provides guidance to the simulation administrator
for specifying the filename pattern in the File Name Pattern box.

10. Click the Add button to add another row.

The Originating Type option in the second row is automatically populated with the value from the
option you have selected in the Destination Type option from the first row.
Primary rule example:

3-84 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define a primary input rule using the PLM XML export method

Traversal rule example for web link definition:

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Relation Destination Type

Direction

CAE Analysis Specifications Web Link None Web Link

Revision

11. (Optional) In the Dataset/URL Name Pattern box, click the Add button to add a dataset name
pattern, for example, datasetname, *datasetname, or datasetname*.
You can use:

• A constant string surrounded by double quotes, for example "Input Deck" or "Results.op2".

Tip:
You can add spaces by including the constant string in double quotes.

The system processes only datasets matching the exact string name.

• Wildcards and strings surrounded by double quotes, for example "Input*" or "*Thermal*key*".
The system treats them as a wildcard and processes the matching datasets.

• The ITEMREVID keyword.

The system replaces the keyword with the ITEMREVID of the item revision that contains the
dataset. You can use this keyword in combination with strings, for example, ITEMREVID”-
FEMap”.

Note:
Keywords are not accepted.

Dataset/URL name pattern example for web link definition:

You can use a combination of wildcards and strings surrounded by quotes, for example,
ITEMREVID.

12. In the File Name Pattern box, click the Add button to add a file name pattern you want to include.
For example, *.dat or *.op2.

Define a primary input rule using the PLM XML export method

1. Select the PLMXML Export option in the Primary Input box.

2. Click the Add button to open the PLMXML Export Details dialog box.

3. In the Rule Name and File Name boxes, type a rule name and file name, respectively.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-85
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

4. From the Transfer Mode menu, select an appropriate option.

Tip:
Traversal rules are not required to export the PLM XML file for the primary input object. However,
you can configure traversal rules to export the PLM XML file for the related object.

Define additional input rules using the file input method

During the tool launch, if the input configuration has additional inputs, then all the named references
related to the additional inputs are exported to the ESP folder. The ESP_additional_inputs_list.txt file
contains a list of the exported files and the ESP_nn_LOGS directory contains the log files.

1. Select the File Input option in the Additional Input box.

2. Click the Add button to open the Additional Input Details dialog box.

3. (Optional) Create additional input rules.

The procedure for creating additional input rules is similar to creating primary input rules using
the file input method.
Example of additional file input rules:

Define additional input rules using the PLM XML export method

During the tool launch, if the input configuration has additional inputs, all the named references related
to the additional inputs and the top level PLM XML file are exported to the ESP folder. The
ESP_additional_inputs_list.txt file contains a list of the exported files and the name of the top level
PLM XML file. The ESP_nn_LOGS directory contains the log files.

1. Select the PLMXML Export option in the Additional Input box.

2. Click the Add button to open the PLM XML Export Details dialog box.

3. In the Rule Name and File Name boxes, type a rule name and a file name, respectively.

4. From the Transfer Mode menu, select an appropriate option.

3-86 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define additional input rules using the PLM XML export method

5. In the Traversal Path table, click the Add button to add a row and activate all options.

6. In the Originating Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option. For example, select
an item revision class such as CAEModelRevision.
The primary type options available here depend on the input types you have added in the Primary
Input Type box.

7. In the Relation column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

8. In the Destination Object column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

9. In the Relation Direction column, click a cell and choose the appropriate option.

• Primary to Secondary indicates the path from an item revision to another and that the
origination item revision is the primary contributor to the relationship.

• Secondary to Primary indicates the path from an item revision to another and that the
secondary item revision class is the primary contributor to the relationship.

10. In the Destination Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option. The options available
here depend on the Destination Object type you choose.
The Destination Type column, depending on the choices you have made in the previous columns,
includes the file extension type in the menu and provides guidance to the simulation administrator
for specifying the filename pattern in the File Name Pattern box.

11. Click the Add button to add another row.

The Originating Type option in the second row is automatically populated with the value from the
option you have selected in the Destination Type option from the first row.
Example for exporting an associated design structure:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-87
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Specify output types and create output rules for the launch process

Specify output types and create output rules

You can use the Output Configuration pane to define the output for the launch process. Process output
includes named references of datasets, datasets associated with item revisions, or item revisions created
by Teamcenter. Simulation Process Management imports suitable named references configured by you
to the temp directory.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Output Configuration tab.

3. Select one of the following options:

• PLM/XML Import option to specify a PLM XML file as the output for the launch process.
This option allows the launch process to generate a PLM XML file. The PLM XML file is imported
back into Teamcenter using PLM XML import procedures after the launch process is complete.

• File Output option to add a traversal rule to include references of datasets, datasets associated
with item revisions, or item revisions created by Teamcenter.

4. In the Create Items section, select one of the following options:

• As Needed to create items as needed when the tool is launched by the analyst.
This is the default option.

• Always to always create items when the tool is launched by the analyst.

• Never to never create items when the tool is launched by the analyst.

5. In the Create Datasets section, select one of the following options:

• As Needed to create datasets as needed when the tool is launched by the analyst.
This is the default option.

• Always to always create datasets when the tool is launched by the analyst.

• Never to never create datasets when the tool is launched by the analyst.

Note:
The analyst can override your selection for the options while launching the simulation tool.

3-88 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define a file output rule

6. (Optional) To allow analysts to select files to import to Teamcenter after successfully launching a
simulation tool, check the Selective Data Import check box.

Note:
This is applicable only for the Local Launch option.

7. To allow analysts to import only modified files to Teamcenter after running a simulation tool again,
check the Import Only Modified Files check box.

8. To prevent data from being automatically uploaded and versioned when a tool launch is complete,
you can specify file upload conflict options.
After the tool launch is complete, based on the output rules, the system verifies each output file
against existing files in the database. All new output files are uploaded to the database. For each
file that has a similar file in the database, based on the file output rules, the system processes the
files based on the following options:

• Prompt User to open the File Upload Conflicts dialog if the same output file exists in the
database. In such cases, the simulation analyst can select the Upload, Rename and Upload, or
Skip option.

• (Default option) Upload for the system to upload output files and create new revisions for
existing files with the same name.

• Rename and Upload for the system to automatically rename the output files with a suffix, if
similar filenames exist, and upload them to the database.

• Skip to avoid uploading the output files, if similar files exist in the database.

Define a file output rule

You can use the File Output option to:

• Specify an output (using a traversal rule) and specify dataset name patterns and file name patterns for
the output.

• Define a relationship type at each step of the traversal rule to traverse to the next object if the
secondary object is an item revision.

• Specify an output type and a naming pattern for the output type.

• Select an option to create items (as needed, always, or never) when the tool is launched by the
analyst.

• Select an option to create datasets (as needed, always, or never) when the tool is launched by the
analyst.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-89
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Create web link definitions.

In some cases, instead of storing large result files in the database, organizations prefer storing the
generated result files on shared network folders. In such cases, the simulation administrator
configures output rules for the system to create web links to result files in the shared network folders.

This option allows the process to generate one or more standard files. These files are uploaded back into
Teamcenter as named references of defined datasets after the launch process is complete. In the case of
web link definitions, the files are not imported back to Teamcenter. Instead, the web link object is
created or updated with the URL of the result file.

Note:
This procedure is applicable only if you select the File Output option in the Output Files pane.

1. Select the File Output option.

2. Click the Add button to open the File Output Details dialog box.

3. In the Rule Name box, type a rule name.

4. In the Traversal Path table, click the Add button to add a row and activate all options.

5. Specify a traversal path as follows:

Example: Output rule (primary to secondary)

Originating Relation Destination Relation Destination Type

Type Object Direction

CAE Analysis CAE Result Item Revision Primary to CAE Result Revision
Revision Specifications Secondary

CAE Result Specifications Dataset CAE Result

Revision

CAE Result None ReferenceType Nastran_results_log

(*.f06 file to be exported
to the temp directory)

Example: Output rule (secondary to primary)

3-90 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define a file output rule

Originating Relation Destination Relation Destination Type

Type Object Direction

CAE Model CAE Defining Item Revision Secondary CAE Analysis Revision
Revision Relationship To Primary

CAE Analysis Specifications Dataset CAE Result

Revision

CAE Result None ReferenceType Nastran_results_log

(*.f06 file to be exported
to the temp directory)

Traversal rule example for web link definitions:

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Relation Destination Type

Direction

CAE Model Revision Specifications Web Link Web Link

6. In the Dataset/URL Name Pattern box, click the Add button to add a dataset name pattern you
want to include.

Tip:
You can create multiple dataset naming patterns.

You can define dataset naming patterns as a:

• Constant string surrounded by quotes, for example, “NXNastran”.

• Combination of wildcards and strings surrounded by quotes, for example, *“FEMap”*“Report”*.

• Keyword: ITEMREVID, FILENAME, and BASEFILENAME.

If the simulation administrator configures the dataset name to this keyword:

• ITEMREVID: Teamcenter places the output file in a dataset name that is identical to the
ITEMREVID of the item revision that contains the dataset. For example, Teamcenter places
the 000987/A file in the 000987/A;1-SampleItem dataset.

• FILENAME: Teamcenter places the output file in a dataset name that is identical to the full file
name. For example, Teamcenter places the excavator.op2 file in the excavator.op2 dataset.
(The file name path is not included in the dataset name.)

• BASEFILENAME: Teamcenter places the output file in a dataset name that is identical to the
file name without its extension. For example, Teamcenter places the excavator.op2 file in the
excavator dataset. (The file name path is not included in the dataset name.)

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-91
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Counter keyword, for example, NNNN for a 4-digit counter.

Note:
You can add spaces by embedding them in quotes, for example, ITEMREVID“ “NNNN. If you
add spaces without embedding them in quotes, Teamcenter displays an invalid naming
pattern error.

You can define dataset naming patterns by using any combination of the above patterns.
Exceptions are as follows:

• If the file extension pattern is not matched or specified, Teamcenter does not export any of the
files.

• Counter keyword and ITEMREVID can only appear once in the naming pattern.

• Any unquoted series of characters containing something other than keywords are interpreted as
a single quoted string to support earlier versions.

Valid naming pattern examples Invalid naming pattern examples

ITEMREVID”-FEMap” “FEMap”ITEMREV.
When quoted strings exist, all characters
outside quotes must be part of a keyword.

“FEMap-“NNN ITEMREVID”FEMap” NNN.

No spaces are allowed except inside quotes.

NNN”-FEMap” ITEMREVID”-“ITEMREVID
ITEMREVID keyword cannot appear more than
once.

“FEMap-“NNNNNN NNN”-“NNN
Counter keyword cannot appear more than
once.

ITEMREVID”-“NNNN nnn”-FEMap”
Keywords are case sensitive.

ITEMREVIDNNNNN

“FEMap”*”-“ITEMREVID

*”FEMap 10”NNN

*”FEMap 10 “*NNN

“FEMap-“NNN”-10”

3-92 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define static or dynamic input parameters for the tool launch script

Valid naming pattern examples Invalid naming pattern examples

NXNASTRAN. This is considered the same as

“NXNASTRAN”.

FEMAPNNITEMREVID. This is considered the

same as “FEMAPNNITEMREVID”. However, the
keywords in this example are not recognized.

Dataset/URL name pattern example for web link definitions:

You can use a combination of wildcards and strings surrounded by quotes, for example,
ITEMREVID"_"FILENAME"_"BASEFILENAME.

7. In the File Name Pattern box, click the Add button to add a file name pattern you want to include,
for example *.op2.

8. Click OK to create a file output.

9. (Optional) Click the Add button in the Output Item Name box to select an output item name.
(Optional) After you add the output item name:

a. To specify a naming pattern, click Modify and type a value in the Name Pattern box.

• "constant-name_"ITEMNAME, for example "femap_"ITEMNAME.

• "constant-name_"ITEMID, for example "femap_"ITEMID.

ITEMNAME and ITEMID are the valid keywords for ItemRevision.

b. To allow the analyst to override the naming pattern you have specified, select the Allow run
time modification check box.

Define static or dynamic input parameters for the tool launch script

You can use the Input Parameter pane to define the parameters that are passed to the launch script
when the launch process is used by an analyst. These parameters can be static or dynamic. Dynamic
parameters can either be extracted from the object attributes or the analyst can enter them at run time
while launching the process.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Input Parameter tab.

3. Click the Add button to add a row and activate all the options in the table.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-93
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

4. In the Name column, click a cell and specify a name for the input parameter.
This name is used when passing values to the launch script at runtime when configured to pass
Name value pair. It is also used to label the field on the launch script dialog when the default
launch dialog is displayed.

5. In the Type column, click a cell and select the type from the list.
Use String, Double, Boolean, or ListofValues to include runtime parameters.
For example, if you specify a parameter such as memory for ListofValues, you can specify valid
values such as 100, 200, and 300 and select 100 as the default. When the tool is launched, the
analyst can choose any of these values and 100 is the default value as set in this example.
Use Item, ItemRevision, or Form to include dynamic parameters. Dynamic attributes can be
extracted from the object attributes.

6. (Optional) Select the Runtime Parameter column, and click a cell to select true or false values.
If you select true, analysts can change the parameter values at run time if a tool launch dialog is
displayed and appropriately configured to accept this input. The default tool launch dialog provides
the capability to enter this information.

7. In the Script Input Option column, click a cell and select an appropriate option from the list.
If a tool is configured with a parameter using the Name value pair script input option, the
parameter is passed to the launch script as Name=Value when the process is launched.
If a tool is configured with a parameter using the Value only script input option, only Value is
passed as a parameter to the launch script when the process is launched. In this case, the script
relies on the order of the parameters passed to interpret their meanings.

8. In the Object Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

9. In the Value column, click a cell and type an appropriate option.

The value entered here is provided as a default value for runtime parameters, and is the provided
value to the launch script for non-runtime parameters.
Analysts can use Edit button in this field to enter the allowable values for both List of Values and
Boolean types. For Boolean types, only the first two entered values are considered.
In the default launch dialog, the List of Values fields are presented as a dropdown box and the
Boolean fields are presented as a check box. The checked state corresponds to the first value in the
Boolean definition.

Set attributes on items, item revisions, and forms for the tool launch process

You can set attributes on an Item, ItemRevision, or Form. The analyst launches simulation tools and the
launch tool provides values for the attributes configured by the simulation administrator. The process is
as follows:

• The administrator specifies an attribute value transfer file.

Teamcenter creates this file in the working directory of the launch tool. This file contains a list of
configured attributes.

• The administrator sets attributes by creating a traversal rule.

3-94 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Set attributes on items, item revisions, and forms for the tool launch process

• The analyst launches the simulation tool.

The simulation tool updates the attributes in the attribute value transfer file.

• Teamcenter reads the attributes in the attribute value transfer file and applies the values to the
configured Teamcenter objects using the traversal path.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Attribute Configuration tab.

3. In the Attribute Transfer File Name box, specify a file name.

Note:
Teamcenter appends .xml to the file name if the extension is not specified.

4. Click the Add button in the Attributes box to open the Attribute Details dialog box.

5. In the Rule Name box, type a rule name.

6. In the Traversal Path table, click the Add button to add a row and activate all options.

7. In the Originating Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option. For example, select
an item revision class such as CAEModelRevision.
The primary type options available here depend on the input types you have added in the Primary
Input Type box in the Input Configuration pane.

8. In the Relation column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

9. In the Destination Object column, click a cell and select an appropriate option.

10. In the Relation Direction column, click a cell and choose one of the following options:

Note:
These options are available only if you select the ItemRevision attribute in the Destination
Object column.

• Primary to Secondary to indicate the path from an item revision to another and that the
origination item revision is the primary contributor to the relationship.

• Secondary to Primary to indicate the path from an item revision to another and that the
secondary item revision class is the primary contributor to the relationship.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-95
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Traversal rules allow you to define a path from the input item revision to an item revision that
ultimately holds the various output files. The Relation Direction option allows you to indicate that
the path from one item revision to another item revision is through a specified relationship and
that the originating item revision is the primary contributor or the secondary contributor to the
relationship.

Note:
If no relationship type is specified for traversing from one item revision to another, the
system considers any item revision class of the specified type and attaches it to the item
revision regardless of the relationship type used to attach it.

11. In the Destination Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option. The options available
here depend on the Destination Object type you have chosen in the previous step.

12. (Optional) Click the Add button to add another row.

The Originating Type option in the second row is automatically populated with the value from the
option you have selected in the option from the first row.

13. Click the Add the selected type/property to the list button to populate the list of attributes in the
Object Attributes box.

14. In the Object Attributes box, click the Add button to add the selected attribute (for example,
Name or Location Code) to the Selected Attributes box.

15. Click OK to complete adding attribute details in the Attribute Details dialog box.

Define a notification list for tool launch completion

The Feedback pane is used to create a notification list about the status of processes and remove or
retain temporary files created by processes.

Note:
Temporary files are removed for local launch only. Simulation Process Management uses
Dispatcher Server components to launch the simulation processes remotely. Dispatcher Client has
it own mechanism to cleanup temporary files. You can configure this using the RequestCleanup
properties in the Service.properties file in the DispatcherClient\conf directory.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Feedback tab.

3. Select the appropriate option for removing temporary files.

Temporary files are created in the temp you have specified.

3-96 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Enable or disable access to simulation tools

• Always to always remove temporary files after completion of the process.

• Never to never remove temporary files.

• On Success to remove temporary files only if the process is successful.

4. To notify an invoking user about completion of the tool execution, select the Notify Invoking User
check box. (This check box is selected by default.)

Note:
Clearing this check box only turns off notification of the invoking user. If other notifications
are configured using the User Notification List or the Group Notification List, they
continue to be honored.

5. In the User Notification List box, select the appropriate users to send notifications.

6. In the Group Notification List box, select the appropriate users to send notifications.

Enable or disable access to simulation tools

The simulation administrator or a user with DBA privileges can set access control. By enabling or
disabling access, you can control access to simulation tools depending on the user, group, or role.

• If you enable or disable access to a group, the configuration applies to users whose context is set to
that group.

• If you enable or disable access to a user or role, then that configuration applies to the user regardless
of group or role, or applies to role regardless of group.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. Click the Access Control tab.

3. Select one of the following options:

• Enable Access to allow access for the selected users, groups, or roles to simulation tools; that is,
access is disabled for those users, groups, or roles who are not listed.

• Disable Access to disallow access for the selected users, groups, or roles to simulation tools; that
is, access is enabled for those users, groups, or roles who are not listed.

4. Select one of the following options:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-97
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• To allow access, select the desired users, groups, or roles from the Organization list and click the
Add button to add them to the Access list.

• To disallow access, select the desired users, groups, or roles from the Access list and click the
Remove button to move them to the Organization list.

5. Click OK to save the configuration.

Simulation tool launch script arguments

File-based single launch with parameter file

Note:
The local detached launch option has been deprecated and will be removed in a future version of
Teamcenter.

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg1 Input file with fully D:\Scratch\-

qualified path ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
ESP_1426108216305\cad001.dat

Arg2 Working directory D:\Scratch\-

with fully qualified ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
path ESP_1426108216305

Arg3 Input item IDs 002004

Arg4 Input revision IDs A

Arg5 Input datasets 002004/A

Arg6 Tool input Default value is noValue -memory=ESTIMATE?-append=no?-

parameters scratch=yes?-Submit to Cluster=no
concatenated
with ?

Arg7 Process name NxNastran

string

Arg8 Input item keys g5ZVyzJWau7jfD

Arg9 Input XML Valid values are as follows. Local Launch: cae1429176454
All other types of launches: D:\Scratch
• Local Launch: -jobid \ESP_Root_-
552f8c6c0000159000005a89\-
• Local Detached simprocess-
Launch, Workflow 552f8c6c0000159000004717
Local Launch, Remote

3-98 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 File-based single launch without parameter file

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Launch, Workflow
Remote Launch, Server
Launch, and Workflow
Server Launch: -
inputXmlName

Arg10 Item creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

Arg11 Dataset creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

File-based single launch without parameter file

Note:
The local detached launch option has been deprecated and will be removed in a future version of
Teamcenter.

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg1 Input file with fully D:\Scratch\-

qualified path ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
ESP_1426108216305\cad001.dat

Arg2 Working directory D:\Scratch\-

with fully qualified ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
path ESP_1426108216305

Arg3 Input item IDs 002004

Arg4 Input revision IDs A

Arg5 Input datasets 002004/A

Arg6 Tool input Default value is noValue -memory=ESTIMATE?-append=no?-

parameters scratch=yes?-Submit to Cluster=no
concatenated
with ?

Arg7 Input item keys g5ZVyzJWau7jfD

Arg8 Input XML Valid values are as follows. Local Launch: cae1429176454
All other types of launches: D:\Scratch
• Local Launch: -jobid \ESP_Root_-
552f8c6c0000159000005a89\-

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-99
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

• Local Detached simprocess-

Launch, Workflow 552f8c6c0000159000004717
Local Launch, Remote
Launch, Workflow
Remote Launch, Server
Launch, and Workflow
Server Launch: -
inputXmlName

Arg9 Item creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

Arg10 Dataset creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

File-based multiple launch with parameter file

Note:
The local detached launch option has been deprecated and will be removed in a future version of
Teamcenter.

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg1 Input file with fully D:\Scratch\-

qualified path ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
ESP_1426108216305\cad001.dat

Arg2 Working directory D:\Scratch\-

with fully qualified ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
path ESP_1426108216305

Arg3 Input item IDs 002004

Arg4 Input revision IDs A

Arg5 Input datasets 002004/A

Arg6 Tool input Default value is noValue -memory=ESTIMATE?-append=no?-

parameters scratch=yes?-Submit to Cluster=no
concatenated
with ?

Arg7 Process name string NxNastran

3-100 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 File-based multiple launch without parameter file

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg8 Input item keys g5ZVyzJWau7jfD

Arg9 Input XML Valid values are as Local Launch: cae1429176454

follows.
All other types of launches: D:\Scratch
\ESP_Root_-
• Local Launch: -jobid 552f8c6c0000159000005a89\-
simprocess-
• Local Detached 552f8c6c0000159000004717
Launch, Remote
Launch, and Server
Launch: -
inputXmlName

Arg10 Item creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

Arg11 Dataset creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

File-based multiple launch without parameter file

Note:
The local detached launch option has been deprecated and will be removed in a future version of
Teamcenter.

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg1 Input file with fully D:\Scratch\-

qualified path ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
ESP_1426108216305\cad001.dat

Arg2 Working directory D:\Scratch\-

with fully qualified ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
path ESP_1426108216305

Arg3 Input item IDs 002004

Arg4 Input revision IDs A

Arg5 Input datasets 002004/A

Arg6 Tool input Default value is noValue -memory=ESTIMATE?-append=no?-

parameters scratch=yes?-Submit to Cluster=no

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-101
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

concatenated
with ?

Arg7 Input item keys g5ZVyzJWau7jfD

Arg8 Input XML Valid values are as Local Launch: cae1429176454

follows.
All other types of launches: D:\Scratch
\ESP_Root_-
• Local Launch: -jobid 552f8c6c0000159000005a89\-
simprocess-
• Local Detached 552f8c6c0000159000004717
Launch, Remote
Launch, and Server
Launch: -
inputXmlName

Arg9 Item creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

Arg10 Dataset creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

PLM XML-based single or multiple launch

Note:
The local detached launch option has been deprecated and will be removed in a future version of
Teamcenter.

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg1 Input file with fully D:\Scratch\-

qualified path ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
ESP_1426108216305\cad001.dat

Arg2 Working directory D:\Scratch\-

with fully qualified ESP_Root_1426108216296\-
path ESP_1426108216305

Arg3 Input item IDs 002004

Arg4 Input revision IDs A

Arg5 Input datasets 002004/A

3-102 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure a simulation tool to extract the KPI values automatically

Arguments Argument list Argument description Example arguments (Windows)

Arg6 Tool input Default value is noValue -memory=ESTIMATE?-append=no?-

parameters scratch=yes?-Submit to Cluster=no
concatenated
with ?

Arg7 Input item keys g5ZVyzJWau7jfD

Arg8 Input XML Valid values are as Local Launch: cae1429176454

follows.
All other types of launches: D:\Scratch
\ESP_Root_-
• Local Launch: -jobid 552f8c6c0000159000005a89\-
simprocess-
• Local Detached 552f8c6c0000159000004717
Launch, Remote
Launch, and Server
Launch: -
inputXmlName

Arg9 Item creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

Arg10 Dataset creation Valid values: As_Needed, As_Needed

Always, and Never.
Default value: Always.

Configure a simulation tool to extract the KPI values automatically

As a simulation administrator, you can set up sample configurations by running the

tcsim_quick_setup.pl script. The sample simulation configurations include the Extract KPI from Result
tool. This is the default tool for extracting KPI values from industry standard CAE results formats such as
OP2 and BUN files automatically. It uses the NX Open utility to load the result files into Simcenter 3D
Results Viewer before performing the extraction. The results from the NX Open utility are then
populated in the KPI table.

The following is an example based on the default simulation tool used to extract KPI values. As a
prerequisite, you must set up the sample configurations by running the tcsim_quick_setup.pl script.

After the simulation analyst launches the preconfigured simulation tool, the system exports the results
files, an attribute XML file containing the KPI table attributes, the launch script, and the NX Open utility
to the staging directory. The system also creates the KPITemplateFile subdirectory to which it exports
the template XML file. The template XML file is an input XML file containing information about the KPI
values that need to be extracted. The NX Open utility reads the template file before it performs the
extraction. The system then calls the launch script, which internally calls the NX Open utility with the
path to the results file, the path to the template XML file and the path to the output directory path as
arguments. The NX Open utility extracts the required KPI values from the results file based on the inputs

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-103
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

provided in the template XML file and generates the output KPI text file. The system then updates the
KPI table in the attribute XML file and populates the KPI table of the analysis revision.

Set up the sample configuration

You must set up the sample configurations by running the tcsim_quick_setup.pl script as a
prerequisite for making the Extract KPI from Result tool available.

1. From the Teamcenter command prompt, browse to the TC_DATA\tcsim\setup directory.

2. To set up sample configurations, run the following command:

tcsim_quick_setup.pl -u=DBAUserName -p=DBAUserPassword -pf=DBAUserPasswordFile

Define the simulation tool for extracting the KPI values automatically

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation Tool
Configuration .

2. From SIMTOOL Utilities, select Extract KPI from Result. This is the default tool used to extract KPI
values.

3. In the Launch Properties tab, the KPI_LaunchScripts dataset is set to the

Extract_KPI_from_Results.pl script and the TC4SIM_KPI_EXTRACTOR.zip compressed file that
contains the NX Open utilities, including the documentation for these utilities.

By default, these files are available from the TC_DATA\tcsim\example_configs\SimulationTool\-

SIMTOOL000001 directory.

3-104 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure a simulation tool to extract the KPI values automatically

Tip:
Ensure that the correct version of Perl is installed. For more information, see TC_DATA\tcsim
\setup\example_configs\SimulationTool\SIMTOOL000001\Tool_Integrations_Notes-
Extract_KPI_from_Result.pdf.

4. (Optional) Click the Input Configuration tab.

In this tab, the primary input type is configured as CAE Analysis Revision and the configuration
contains some primary input rules by default. In addition, the configuration contains the KPI/A;1-
Thermal-Template as an optional input.

You can create your own custom template XML file and specify it as an optional input for extracting
KPI values.

By default, the ThermalTemplate.xml file is available from the TC_DATA\tcsim\example_configs\-

SimulationTool\SIMTOOL000001 directory.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-105
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

5. (Optional) Click the Attribute Configuration tab.

You can optionally provide a filename for the attribute XML file in this tab. By default, it is set to
KPI_attribute.xml.

This attribute has a default rule to export the KPI table attributes as follows:

3-106 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure style sheets for simulation tool launch

Configure style sheets to allow analysts to launch simulation tools

Configure style sheets for simulation tool launch

The simulation administrator can specify a launch dialog style sheet for configured simulation tools. The
launch dialog style sheet is used to render the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box for analysts. If you do
not specify a style sheet, the default style sheet is used to render this dialog box.

The default style sheet, the SampleLaunchSimToolDialogHTML.html file, is available from the
CAE_ESP_Sample_Files.zip file in the TC_DATA directory. The default style sheet template is created
using Knockout, an open source JavaScript library. For more information about customizing this style
sheet, see the Knockout website.

The location of the view model java script (CaeToolLaunchDialogViewModel.js) file is as follows:

• 4 Tier: staging\webapp_root\teamcenter\ html_xrt\tcsim_scripts

\CaeToolLaunchDialogViewModel.js

• 2 Tier: rich client log file\commonclient\localserver_localhost\Teamcenter_ userid\teamcenter

\html_xrt\tcsim_scripts\CaeToolLaunchDialogViewModel.js
You can see look up the Rich Client Log File path from Teamcenter→Help→About. For example,
C:\Users\Teamcenter_ userid\Teamcenter\RAC\20180709123338\Teamcenter_
userid_TcRAC_20180910095723.log

You can share the launch dialog style sheet with any number of configured simulation tool categories or
simulation tools even if they are from different categories. You can select the same launch dialog style
sheet filename for multiple tools either by selecting a launch display file in the UI or selecting the
Inheritance check box for sub processes.

After you specify the full path for the tool launch dialog style sheet in the Simulation Tool
Configuration view, the file is imported and the configured parameter in the XML configuration file is
recorded as only a filename with an extension. If you specify only a filename with extension, it is
assumed that the filename already exists in the TCCAESimToolConfig102009 default dataset (indicated
by the CAE_simulation_tool_config_dsname preference) and is not imported.

Modify style sheets for simulation tool launch

All CAE Manager rich client application views and dialog boxes are rendered based on XML style sheets.
You use style sheets to change the layout of pages such as forms, dialog boxes, and views. Style sheets
are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering datasets.

You can modify Teamcenter style sheets and specify a link to allow analysts to launch simulation tools
defined in CAE Manager.

1. In My Teamcenter, click Open Search View on the main toolbar, click Select a Search in the view
toolbar and choose the General search type.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-107
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

2. To locate the style sheet you want to modify, click Clear all search fields in the view toolbar, type
baseitemrev* in the Name box, and perform the search.

Warning:
There is no dedicated CAEItemRevSummary style sheet. The BaseItemRevSummary is a
summary style sheet type and is registered to the Item Revision type. Therefore, you may
want to create a custom style sheet based on an existing style sheet because when you edit
the BaseItemRevSummary style sheet, you change all summary style sheets for the Item
Revision type.

3. Add the following command action key and parameter value in the first section titled
tc_xrt_actions:
Example:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_actions" commandLayout="vertical">

<command actionKey = "copyAction" commandId = "com.teamcenter.rac.copy"/>
<command actionKey = "reviseAction" commandId =
"com.teamcenter.rac.revise"/>
<command actionKey = "saveAsAction" commandId =
"org.eclipse.ui.file.saveAs"/>
<command actionKey = "newProcessAction" titleKey = "tc_xrt_newProc"

commandId = "com.teamcenter.rac.newProcess"/>

<! -- Add a link to launch simulation tools -->

<command commandId="com.teamcenter.rac.tcsim.commands.launchsimproc"
title="Launch_Tool_Name">
<parameter value="com.teamcenter.rac.tcsim.commands.SimTool-00017"
name="com.teamcenter.rac.tcsim.LaunchSimulationProcess"/>
</command>
</section>

Note:
The tool ID is required for the style sheet configuration. When the tool is invoked from the
style sheet, the latest released revision of the corresponding simulation tool is launched.
You can use blank characters in the com.teamcenter.rac.tcsim.commands.itemID line
for the parameter value.

4. Replace Launch_Tool_Name with the name of the simulation tool you want analysts to launch, for
example, Launch NxNastran.

3-108 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure workflow templates

Tip:
The link you specify is available from the Summary tab of CAE Manager; it is not enabled
from the Summary tab of My Teamcenter.

5. Specify the tool ID of the simulation tool you want the analyst to launch. In the above example
(step 3), the tool ID is SimTool-00017.

6. To modify the style sheet, click Apply.

Configure workflow templates for launching simulation tools

Configure workflow templates

You can use Teamcenter Workflow Designer to configure workflow handlers to allow analysts to launch
simulation tools from Simulation Process Management.

• After you create a workflow template, an analyst cannot modify the template at the time of launching
the workflow.

• Analysts can use the workflow template to launch only the simulation tools associated with the tasks
defined in the template.

• For remote launch, you must install and configure the Dispatcher Management functionality.

• After successful completion of a workflow launch:

• Objects are created in Teamcenter and appropriate relationships created between the objects
depending on the simulation tool configuration.

• Output files from the simulation tool are imported into appropriate Teamcenter datasets.

• New output files are uploaded to the database. For each output filename that has a similar
filename in the database, the system processes the files based on the file upload conflict options
specified by the simulation administrator.

• Operating system folders created to support the execution of the launch tool are cleaned according
to the simulation tool configuration.
Simulation Process Management uses Dispatcher Server components to launch the simulation tools
remotely. Dispatcher Client has its own mechanism to cleanup temporary files. You can configure
this using the RequestCleanup properties in the DispatcherClient\conf\Service.properties file.

• Notifications are sent to analysts after successful completion or failure of a workflow process.

To allow analysts to launch simulation tools from a workflow, you must define an appropriate workflow
template that leverages the CAE-simulation-process-launch-handler action handler option.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-109
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Note:
You can create process templates from workflow templates for local, remote, or server launch;
workflow templates are not supported for local detached launch.

The following are the high-level procedures for creating or modifying a workflow process template.

1. Create a new process template using the Workflow Designer.

2. From the Action Handler menu, choose CAE-simulation-process-launch-handler.

3. Specify the following arguments and values as appropriate.

The –tool argument is mandatory and requires the simulation tool ID value. The rest of the
arguments are optional and can be specified without any values.
Tool names and revisions are no longer supported. The tool is now launched with the latest
released revision. If you have an existing action handler with a tool name and revision values, you
must modify them and use only the tool ID value.

Argument Value Description

–tool tool_ID The simulation tool ID of the tool you want analysts to launch.
Example of a The simulation tool ID you specify here must match the
tool ID: 00001 simulation tool ID defined in the Simulation Tool
where 00001 is Configuration view in CAE Manager.
the CAE tool
object ID.

–launch LOCAL, This argument is mandatory if you select the Remote Launch
SERVER, or option in the Simulation Tool Configuration view in CAE
REMOTE Manager.
Specify:

• LOCAL to launch the simulation tool on the Teamcenter

server. This launch option does not use the Dispatcher
framework.

• SERVER to launch the simulation tool on the Teamcenter

server. This launch option does not use the Dispatcher
framework.

• REMOTE to launch the simulation tool on a different

machine. This launch option uses the Dispatcher framework.

If this value is not specified, the handler assumes the launch

type to be local, that is, the machine on which Teamcenter
server is running.

3-110 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure workflow templates

Argument Value Description

The parameters for this argument are case sensitive, for

example, LOCAL, SERVER, or REMOTE.

–nosync Not applicable If specified, an asynchronous process running in the

background is invoked to launch the tool and the workflow task
does not wait for the completion of the tool.
If not specified, the workflow task waits for the tool launch
process to complete before moving to the next task.

–continue Not applicable If specified, the current task moves to the next task after
completion even if the current task fails.
If not specified, the task stops on failure.
This argument is not valid if you specify the –nosync
argument.

–noref Not applicable If specified, the handler does not add output objects as
reference attachments.
If not specified, the handler adds output objects as reference
attachments in the Reference folder.
This argument is valid for local launch only. Remote launch is
always executed in non-synchronous mode and output objects
are never added as reference attachments.
This argument is not valid if you specify the –nosync
argument.

–param::- paramValue Used to assign runtime parameter values for any parameters
paramName already defined as part of the tool configuration in the
Simulation Tool Configuration view in CAE Manager.
Launches the tool with the paramValue value for the
paramName parameter as defined in the tool configuration.
The specified parameters are processed according to the
defined configuration.
The paramName value must be defined as a runtime
parameter for tool configuration in the Simulation Tool
Configuration view. Any runtime parameters defined in the
tool configuration that are not indicated as action handler
arguments inherit the default values defined in the tool
configuration. The paramValue value can be an empty string,
in which case the default value of the corresponding
paramName is overridden with an empty value.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-111
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Export and import workflow templates

1. Choose Tools→Export to export the template you created. Specify a directory and name for the file
you want to export.

2. In Teamcenter, choose Tools→Import→From PLMXML to import the workflow template (XML file)
you exported. Ensure that you choose the workflow_template_import option from the Transfer
Mode Name menu.

Set up Dispatcher to launch simulation tools from different machines

Prerequisites for setting up Dispatcher on modules

You can set up Dispatcher on different machines or modules that have simulation tools. Analysts can
launch simulation tools as local detached, remote, or server launch after you configure simulation tools
and set up Dispatcher on the required modules.

• Install Dispatcher components on the Teamcenter server using TEM.

• Install Simulation Process Management on the Teamcenter server.

1. Start TEM, select Configuration Manager, and click Next.

2. Select Add new configuration or Performance maintenance on an existing configuration,

and click Next.

3. Specify configuration information for new configuration or select an existing configuration, and
click Next.

4. Select Add/Remove Features, and click Next.

5. Under Extensions, select Simulation Process Management, and click Next.

TEM displays additional panels depending on the components you choose. Complete the
installation process.

• If you use the RMI mode for Dispatcher:

• The clients and Dispatcher Server should point to the common staging directory and they both
should have read/write permissions to that directory for file transfers.
This eliminates the need for file transfers from clients and module locations. Clients write the
translator input files to the common staging directory and modules write the translator result files
to the staging directory in the results directory. For example, if d:\StagingDir is the common
staging directory for the module machine, then \\ModuleMachine\StagingDir on the client
machine (can be a different machine) should be the same directory, that is, StagingDir.

3-112 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Set up Dispatcher on different machines

• The client and Dispatcher Server should be installed by the same user (for example, infodba) to
avoid directory access issues since the client and Dispatcher modules use the same staging
location.

• In the common staging directory configuration, the Dispatcher module should have directory-
create permission and write access to files on the client staging location using the network.
This means that when you access the staging location from the module machine, you can access or
list (in Linux systems) the directory contents of the staging location. The staging location can be a
network-shared location.

• Share and map the path to the TC_ROOT and TC_DATA directory on the Teamcenter server from all
modules.

• Set up the required Java version on all modules.

Set up Dispatcher on different machines

To reduce the time required to set up Dispatcher on modules, copy the required Dispatcher components
from the Teamcenter server to the module and perform the following essential configuration
procedures:

1. Copy the TC_ROOT\Dispatcher\Module directory from the Teamcenter server to each module.

2. Set the MODULEBASE and JAVABIN entities for modules by editing the Dispatcher\Module\conf
\translator.xml file on all modules to make the following changes:

a. Set the MODULEBASE entity to the current location of the module directory on the module.
Example:

<?xml version="1.0" ?>

<!DOCTYPE Translators[
<!ENTITY MODULEBASE "\\machine_name\Module">

b. Set the JAVABIN entity to the bin location of the JRE installation.
Example:

<!ENTITY JAVABIN "C:\apps\Java\jre7x64\bin">

c. Enable the required services such as nxnastran and simprocess by setting the isactive
attribute to true.

Note:
You can also use TEM to configure these services instead of manually editing the
translator.xml file.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-113
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

nxnastran example:

<!-- Configuration of the Simulation Process - nxnastran -->

<NxNastran provider="SIEMENS" service="nxnastran"
isactive="true">
<TransExecutable dir="&MODULEBASE;/Translators/simprocess"
name="tc_launch_sim_process_ts_pl.bat"/>
<Options>
<Option name="inputpath" string=""
description="Full path to the input file."/>
<Option name="outputdir" string=""
description="Full path to the output directory."/>
</Options>
<FileExtensions>
<InputExtensions nitem="1">
<InputExtension extension=".xml"/>
</InputExtensions>
</FileExtensions>
</NxNastran>

3. Set the staging directory, log volume location, and scheduler URL by editing the Module\conf
\transmodule.properties file on all modules:

Note:
Use forward slashes (/) as path separators while editing all properties in the
transmodule.properties file.

• To specify the staging directory, set the Staging.Dir property to the mapped drive path.
Example:

Staging.Dir=//machine_name_of_Teamcenter_server/TC_ROOT/Dispatcher

where the staging directory is a directory inside the Dispatcher root directory, that is, TC_ROOT
\Dispatcher\staging.

• To specify the log location, set the LogVolumeLocation property to a desired location on the
module.
Example:
Change LogVolumeLocation=C:/PROGRA~1/Siemens/TEAMCE~1/
DISPAT~1/Logs to LogVolumeLocation=module/Dispatcher/Logs

• To specify the scheduler URL, set the Scheduler.URL property to the Teamcenter server or any
other host name on which Scheduler is running.
Example:
Change Scheduler.URL=rmi://localhost:2001 to Scheduler.URL=rmi://machine_name_of_-
Teamcenter_server:2001

3-114 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Enable SimProcess and NxNastran services for remote launch

4. Set the TC_ROOT and JAVA_HOME properties by editing the Dispatcher\Module\bin

\runmodule.bat file on all modules:

• Set the TC_ROOT\install directory to the mapped drive.

Example:
Change call "C:\Program Files\Siemens\Teamcenter10\install\tem_init.bat" to call "\
\machine_name_of_Teamcenter_server\TC_ROOT\install\tem_init.bat"

• Set the JAVA_HOME property to path of the Java installation directory.

Example:
Change set JAVA_HOME=%TC_JRE_HOME% to set JAVA_HOME=C:\apps\Java\jre7x64\bin

5. To copy translators or services, copy the TC_ROOT\Dispatcher\Module\Translators directory to the

Module directory on all modules.

Enable SimProcess and NxNastran services for remote launch

You can enable the SimProcess and NxNastran services on Dispatcher to launch a simulation process or
NX Nastran remotely by using Simulation Process Management.

1. To specify the Perl installation location for the SimProcess service, edit the Module\Translators
\simprocess\tc_launch_sim_process_ts_pl.bat file.
When you copy the translators or services to a module, share and map the path to the TC_ROOT
\perl\bin\perl.exe file on the Teamcenter server. By default, the batch files for the SimProcess and
NxNastran services point to the default Perl location of Teamcenter, and not the mapped path
required for modules.
Example:
Change %TC_ROOT%\perl\bin\perl -I%TC_ROOT%\perl\lib %0 %* to Z:\TC_ROOT\perl\bin\perl
where Z is the shared and mapped path to the Teamcenter installation Perl directory.

2. Configure local detached launch.

Note:
The local detached launch option has been deprecated and will be removed in a future
version of Teamcenter.

a. Open the Module\conf\translator.xml file.

b. Copy the SimProcess or NxNastran service tags to another area of the translator.xml file.
SimProcess service example:

<!-- Configuration of the Simulation Process - simprocess -->

<SimProcess provider="SIEMENS" service="simprocess" isactive="false">
<TransExecutable dir="&MODULEBASE;/Translators/simprocess"
name="tc_launch_sim_process_ts_pl.bat"/>
<Options>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-115
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<Option name="inputpath" string=""

description="Full path to the input file."/>
<Option name="outputdir" string=""
description="Full path to the output directory."/>
</Options>
<FileExtensions>
<InputExtensions nitem="1">
<InputExtension extension=".xml"/>
</InputExtensions>
</FileExtensions>
</SimProcess>

c. Make the following changes to the service tags you have copied.

• Append the simprocess tag name with the machine name of the module, that is,
simprocess_module_name

• Append the service="simprocess" tag with the machine name of the module, that is,
service="simprocess_module_name".

Note:
You must specify the module_name value in uppercase for both Linux and Windows.

SimProcess service example for local detached launch:

<!-- Configuration of the Simulation Process - simprocess_module_name -->

<SimProcess provider="SIEMENS" service="simprocess_module_name"
isactive="false">
<TransExecutable dir="&MODULEBASE;/Translators/simprocess"
name="tc_launch_sim_process_ts_pl.bat"/>
<Options>
<Option name="inputpath" string=""
description="Full path to the input file."/>
<Option name="outputdir" string=""
description="Full path to the output directory."/>
</Options>
<FileExtensions>
<InputExtensions nitem="1">
<InputExtension extension=".xml"/>
</InputExtensions>
</FileExtensions>
</SimProcess>

d. Activate a service by setting the isactive property to true. By default, it is set to false.
Example:

3-116 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Enable SimProcess and NxNastran services for remote launch

<SimProcess provider="SIEMENS" service="simprocess_module_name"

isactive="true">

e. Add the TaskPrep and DatabaseOperation classes by editing the Module\Dispatcher

\DispatcherClient\conf\Service.properties file for each service you added in the
translator.xml file.
Example:

# Translator.<provider name>.<translator name>.Prepare=

# Translator.<provider name>.<translator name>.Load=

Add the following lines:

Translator.SIEMENS.simprocess_module_name
.Prepare=com.teamcenter.dc.simprocess.TaskPrep
Translator.SIEMENS.simprocess_module_name
.Load=com.teamcenter.dc.simprocess.DatabaseOperation

f. Repeat steps d and e for each process that you want to configure.

3. Configure server launch.

a. Open the Module\conf\translator.xml file.

b. Copy the SimProcess or NxNastran service tags to another area of the translator.xml file.
SimProcess service example:

<!-- Configuration of the Simulation Process - simprocess -->

<SimProcess provider="SIEMENS" service="simprocess" isactive="false">
<TransExecutable dir="&MODULEBASE;/Translators/simprocess"
name="tc_launch_sim_process_ts_pl.bat"/>
<Options>
<Option name="inputpath" string=""
description="Full path to the input file."/>
<Option name="outputdir" string=""
description="Full path to the output directory."/>
</Options>
<FileExtensions>
<InputExtensions nitem="1">
<InputExtension extension=".xml"/>
</InputExtensions>
</FileExtensions>
</SimProcess>

c. Make the following changes to the service tags you have copied.

• Append the simprocess tag name with the machine name of the module, that is,
simprocess_SERVER

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-117
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Append the service="simprocess" tag with the machine name of the module, that is,
service="simprocess_SERVER"

SimProcess service example for server launch:

<!-- Configuration of the Simulation Process - simprocess_SERVER -->

<SimProcess provider="SIEMENS" service="simprocess_SERVER" isactive="false">
<TransExecutable dir="&MODULEBASE;/Translators/simprocess"
name="tc_launch_sim_process_ts_pl.bat"/>
<Options>
<Option name="inputpath" string=""
description="Full path to the input file."/>
<Option name="outputdir" string=""
description="Full path to the output directory."/>
</Options>
<FileExtensions>
<InputExtensions nitem="1">
<InputExtension extension=".xml"/>
</InputExtensions>
</FileExtensions>
</SimProcess>

d. Activate a service by setting the isactive property to true. By default, it is set to false.
Example:

<SimProcess provider="SIEMENS" service="simprocess_SERVER"

isactive="true">

e. Add the TaskPrep and DatabaseOperation classes by editing the Module\Dispatcher

\DispatcherClient\conf\Service.properties file for each service you added in the
translator.xml file.
Example:

# Translator.<provider name>.<translator name>.Prepare=

# Translator.<provider name>.<translator name>.Load=

Add the following lines:

Translator.SIEMENS.simprocess_SERVER
.Prepare=com.teamcenter.dc.simprocess.TaskPrep
Translator.SIEMENS.simprocess_SERVER
.Load=com.teamcenter.dc.simprocess.DatabaseOperation

f. Repeat steps d and e for each process you want to configure.

3-118 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Why use the simulation dashboard?

Configure the simulation dashboard

Why use the simulation dashboard?

The simulation dashboard provides a clear view of the status of all the models and analyses carried out
by simulation analysts at the program, milestone, group, or individual user level. It allows decision
makers to access the latest information and make correct decisions.

The simulation dashboard:

• Displays the list and status of all models and analyses based on a query.

• Displays the status of models and analyses based on variants of the vehicle or master structure based
on the pedigree information.

• Presents the status of the results corresponding to the models and analyses.

• Monitors key performance indicator (KPI) values such as maximum stress, minimum temperature, or
maximum displacement from analysis revisions or analysis templates.

Configure an analysis or a model dashboard

After you create dashboards, the system saves them in the database as CAE Configuration objects with
the configuration type as Analysis Dashboard or Model Dashboard.

You can use an existing analysis or model dashboard, clone it, and quickly create a new one. While
creating a new one using a cloning method, you cannot modify the type after you clone it. For example,
if you select an analysis dashboard and clone it, you cannot change it later to a model dashboard.

After creating dashboards, a user with DBA privileges can use the cae_migrate_configurations utility to
export the dashboard configurations to a different site or machine and import them again using the
same utility.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation
Dashboard Configuration .

2. Select the Site, Group, or User scope option.

3. To create a simulation dashboard, click Create Simulation Dashboard in the view toolbar.

4. Select Analysis Dashboard or Model Dashboard.

5. Assign an ID and a revision.

6. Type a dashboard name in the Name box.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-119
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

7. (Optional) Specify a description in the Description box.

8. To create the dashboard, click OK.

Specify a dashboard name and the object types to monitor

1. Click the General tab.

2. Specify an object name in the Object Title box.

This is the name that appears in the first column header when the simulation analyst opens the
dashboard.

3. Select the object types you want to monitor.

You can either monitor all the components of the selected model BOM, including the sub-
assemblies and the root, or only the leaf level components.

• All Component Types to monitor all components; OR

• Specific Component Types to monitor only specific component types.

After selecting this option, select the component types you want to monitor from the All
Available Types box and move them to the Selected Types box. You must select at least one
component type.

3-120 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure attributes to monitor

Specify attributes, classification attributes, files, and variant options you

want to monitor

Configure attributes to monitor

While configuring attributes to monitor, you can:

• Specify multiple rules against each analysis type in a configuration with multiple analysis types.

• Include the same attribute name for each rule you specify as long as they have different traversal
paths (see examples that follow).

• Specify multiple attribute names for each rule you specify (see examples that follow).

Note:
You cannot create duplicate rules with the same traversal path for the selected analysis type.

1. Click the Columns to Monitor tab.

2. To add a column to monitor, click the Add button.

3. Specify a column name for the file you want to monitor, and then select Attribute.

4. Create a list of rules.

a. In the List of Rules section, click the Add button.

b. Specify a name for the rule.

After you create rules, you can remove rules, clear all rules, or specify an order for the rules.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-121
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

5. Create traversal rules for each of the rules you created earlier.

a. Select a rule in the List of Rules section.

b. To create a traversal rule, in the Traversal Rules section, click the Add button.

Each of these rules can have the same attribute name or the same file extension if they have
different traversal paths.

Attribute name example File extension example

CAE Analysis Revision → FormX → AttX CAE Analysis Revision → Nastran → *.op2

CAE Analysis Revision → FormY → AttX CAE Analysis Revision → CAE Result → *.op2

CAE Analysis Revision → FormZ → AttX CAE Analysis Revision → CustomDataset → *.op2

Each of the rules can have multiple attribute names or multiple file extensions if they have
different traversal paths.

3-122 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure classification attributes to monitor

Attribute name example File extension example

CAE Analysis Revision → FormX → CAE Analysis Revision → CAE Result → *.op2
AttX

CAE Analysis Revision → FormY → CAE Analysis Revision → AnsysResults → *.odb

AttY

CAE Analysis Revision → FormZ → CAE Analysis Revision → AnsysThermalResults →

AttZ *.rth

Traversal rule example for Model User data1:

Originating Type Relation Destination Destination Type Attribute

Object

CAE Analysis CAE Defining ItemRevision CAE Model Revision None

Revision Relationship

CAE Model Item Masters Form CAE Model Revision User Data 1
Revision Master

Traversal rule example for Results User data1:

Originating Type Relation Destination Destination Type Attribute

Object

CAE Analysis CAE Defining ItemRevision CAE Model Revision None

Revision Relationship

CAE Model Item Masters Form CAE Model Revision User Data 1
Revision Master

Configure classification attributes to monitor

You can configure dashboards to display the classification attributes inherited from the parent item.
Within the traversal rule, you can set the following:

• Destination Object as Item.

• Destination Type as the parent item type.

• Specify the classification ID of the attribute in the Classification Attribute ID column.

In the dashboard, you can display any number of classification attributes from all the available
component types by configuring separate rules for each attribute.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-123
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

1. Click the Columns to Monitor tab.

2. To add a column to monitor, click the Add button.

3. Specify a column name for the file you want to monitor and then select Classification Attribute.

4. Create a list of rules.

a. In the List of Rules section, click the Add button.

b. Specify a name for the rule.

After you create rules, you can remove rules, clear all rules, or specify an order for the rules.

5. Create traversal rules for each of the rules you created earlier.

a. Select a rule from the List of Rules section.

b. To create a traversal rule, in the Traversal Rules section, click the Add button.

Traversal rule example 1:

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Destination Type Classification Attribute ID

CAE Model Revision None Item CAE Model 10050

Traversal rule example 2:

Originating Type Relation Destination Destination Type Classification

Object Attribute ID

CAE Model CAE Source Item Revision CAE Geometry None

Revision Relationship Revision

CAE Geometry CAE Target Item Revision Item Revision 1001

Revision Relationship

Configure files to monitor

1. Click the Columns to Monitor tab.

2. To add a column to monitor, click the Add button.

3. Specify a column name for the file you want to monitor, and then select the File attribute.

4. Create a list of rules.

3-124 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure files to monitor

a. In the List of Rules section, click the Add button.

b. Specify a name for the rule.

After you create rules, you can remove rules, clear all rules, or specify an order for the rules.

5. Create traversal rules for each of the rules you created earlier.

a. Select a rule in the List of Rules section.

b. To create a traversal rule, in the Traversal Rules section, click the Add button.

Traversal rule example for NX CAD:

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Destination Type

CAE Analysis Revision CAETarget Relationship ItemRevision ItemRevision

ItemRevision Specifications Dataset UGMaster

UGMaster None ReferenceType UGPART(*.prt)

Traversal rule example for CAD JT:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-125
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Destination Type

CAE Analysis Revision CAETarget Relationship ItemRevision ItemRevision

ItemRevision Rendering Dataset Direct Model

Direct Model None ReferenceType JTPART(*.jt)

Configure variant options to monitor

While configuring variant options, you can:

• Specify the variant option values (captured in the model or analysis pedigree objects) to monitor.

• Monitor one or more variant option values.

• Specify traversal rules for any variant option value captured in the analysis pedigree or model
pedigree with reference to the selected item revision type you want to monitor.

1. Click the Columns to Monitor tab.

2. To add a column to monitor, click the Add button.

3. Specify a column name for the file you want to monitor, and then select the Variant Option
attribute.

4. Create a list of rules.

a. In the List of Rules section, click the Add button.

b. Specify a name for the rule.

5. Create traversal rules for each of the rules you created earlier.

a. Select a rule in the List of Rules section.

b. To create a traversal rule, in the Traversal Rules section, click the Add button.

Traversal rule example:

Originating Type Relation Destination Type Variant Option Name

CAE Analysis Revision CAE Defining CAE Model Revision Engine Style
Relationship

3-126 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Create a simulation dashboard and configure the KPI attributes to monitor

Create a simulation dashboard and configure the KPI attributes to monitor

In this example, you create a column attribute for KPI Stress that originates from the analysis revision
and another column attribute for KPI Strain that originates from the analysis template.

Create a simulation dashboard to monitor KPI values

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose Simulation
Dashboard Configuration .

2. Select the Site, Group, or User scope option.

3. To create a simulation dashboard, click Create Simulation Dashboard in the view toolbar.

4. Select the Analysis Dashboard.

5. Assign an ID and a revision.

6. Type a dashboard name in the Name box.

7. (Optional) Specify a description in the Description box.

8. To create the dashboard, click OK.

Specify KPI attributes to monitor

1. Create a simulation dashboard to monitor KPI values.

2. Click the General tab.

3. Specify an object name in the Object Title box.

This is the name that appears in the first column header when the simulation analyst opens the
dashboard.

4. Select the object types you want to monitor. Select Specific Component Types and select CAE
Analysis Revision from the All Available Types box and move them to the Selected Types box.

5. Click the Columns to Monitor tab.

6. To add a column to monitor, click the Add button.

7. Specify a column name for the file you want to monitor, for example, KPI Stress, and then select
Attribute.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-127
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

8. Create the first rule to monitor stress.

a. In the List of Rules section, click the Add button.

b. Specify a name for the rule, for example, Stress.

9. Create a traversal rule for the first rule.

a. Select the rule in the List of Rules section.

b. To create a traversal rule, in the Traversal Rules section, click the Add button to add the first
row of the rule.

c. In the Originating Type column, select CAE Analysis Revision.

d. In the Attribute column, select KPI Table.

e. Click the Add button to add the second row of the rule.

The system automatically populates the second row of the Originating Type column with the
value from the Attribute column of the first row.

f. In the Attribute column of the second row, click the Add button. Select appropriate values
from the Input Table Property and Table Property to Monitor menus, and type the
appropriate value in the Input Table Property Value box.

g. To create the new rules, click OK.

10. Create the second rule.

a. In the List of Rules section, click the Add button.

b. Specify a name for the rule, for example Strain.

11. Create another traversal rule for the second rule.

a. Select the second rule in the List of Rules section.

b. Repeat steps b to g.

After configuring the dashboard

1. To save the simulation dashboard configuration, click Save Simulation Dashboard Configuration
in the view toolbar.

3-128 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Customize the simulation template used to display the dashboard reports

2. To clone the simulation dashboard configuration, click Clone Simulation Dashboard in the
view toolbar.

3. To delete the simulation dashboard configuration, click Delete Simulation Dashboard

Configuration in the view toolbar.

You can delete a dashboard only if you have write access to the rule set.

Customize the simulation template used to display the dashboard reports

After viewing the results in the simulation dashboard, simulation analysts can generate a report of the
dashboard. The dashboard report is exported to Microsoft Excel format.

As a simulation administrator or a designated user, you can include a new Microsoft Excel template or
update the existing one that is used to display the dashboard report.

In the rich client, you can add any number of templates. However, Active Workspace supports only
CAE_default_Simulation_Dashboard_template.

Note:
Only template revisions with names starting with CAE are displayed as valid templates for the
export of simulation dashboard results. The naming convention starting with CAE is not case
sensitive.

Add a new template

1. In the Home tab of My Teamcenter or CAE Manager, select a folder and click File→New→Item.

2. Select Item and click Next.

3. Specify the name as cae_analysis_simulation_dashboard and click Finish.

The naming convention is not case sensitive.

4. To associate a file type to the item revision, you must create a dataset. In the Home tab, select the
item revision you created and click File→New→Dataset.

5. (Optional) Specify a name for the dataset. If you do not specify a name, the system populates the
ID of the item revision you have selected.

6. Click More and select MS ExcelX as the file associate type.

7. Click Import to select the Microsoft Excel file you want to associate and click OK.

Use the cae_add_report_templates utility to import multiple templates.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-129
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Update an existing template

1. To search for the existing template, in My Teamcenter, click Advanced search.

2. From Select a Search, select Item.

3. In the Name box, type cae*.

4. In the Type box, replace Item with ExcelTemplate, and click Search.

5. Double-click the search result to open the excel template in My Teamcenter and expand the Excel
Template Revision.

6. Right-click the MS Excel type, select Check-In/Out and select Check Out.

7. Right-click the MS Excel type and select Named References. Select the default template and
remove it.

Click Upload and select the Microsoft Excel template you want to import and close the Named
References dialog.

8. Right-click the MS Excel type, select Check-In/Out and select Check In.

Alternatively, use the cae_add_report_templates utility to update an existing template by selecting the
-update option.

Map material revisions from the source structure to the target

structure

Map material revisions from the product to the model

Prerequisite

Teamcenter materials management must be installed and ready to use for mapping material revisions.

For more information about installing Teamcenter materials management, see Managing Materials on
Rich Client in the Teamcenter collection.

Process flow for exporting material information

1. Maps material revisions from the product structure

Simulation administrator to the model structure by modifying the
datamapping.xml file.

3-130 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Map material revisions from the product to the model

2. Defines a simulation tool to export the material

information. This tool is configured for a specific type
of solver, for example, Simcenter STAR-CCM+.

1. Generates the model structure from a product

structure by using data map rules or structure map
rules. The generated model structure references the
material revisions from the product structure.
2. Selects the generated model structure and runs the
preconfigured simulation tool. The material
Simulation analyst information is exported.
3. Performs the analysis by running a preconfigured
analysis tool, for example, Simcenter STAR-CCM+. The
analysis tool uses the exported material information
for running the analysis.
4. Captures the results from the solver, verifies the
results, and sends recommendations.

Map material revisions from the product to the model

You (as a user with DBA privileges) can uncomment the datamapping.xml and NodeXMLConfig files to
map material revisions from the product revision (source) to the model revision (target). The simulation
analyst can then generate model structures with the mapped material objects using data mapping and
structure map rules.

By default, the material revision mapping is not enabled and is commented in the datamapping.xml
and NodeXMLConfig files. You can uncomment these files to specify:

• All associated Mat1MaterialRevision objects with the Mat1UsesMaterial relation from the product
revision (source) you want to map and reference to the corresponding model revision (target) with
the same relation.

• (Optional) The material objects you want to map to secondary objects or CAE Geometry revisions
that are created through data mapping and structure map rules.

1. Locate the datamapping.xml file.

The datamapping.xml sample file is located in the TC_DATA directory. However, the file used at
runtime is managed in a CAEStructureMap dataset attached to the item revision indicated by the
CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

a. Open the datamapping.xml sample file from the TC_DATA directory.

b. Search for MaterialRevision in this file.

<!-- Example: To Map all attached Materials of type Mat1MaterialRevision to

input item revisions of relationship Materials to be referenced to output

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-131
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

CAE Model revisions with same ( Materials ) relationship -->

<!--Begin MATERIAL_MAP-->
<!--<xsl:for-each select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=&apos;Mat1MaterialRevision&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;Mat1MaterialRevision&apos;]">
<xsl:if test="smn:NODE_LINKS/smn:NODE_LINK/@RELATIONSHIP_TYPE=&apos;
Mat1UsesMaterial&apos;">
<xsl:call-template name="MaterialRevision">
<xsl:with-param name="operationtype">REFERENCE</xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="outrelationshiptype">Mat1UsesMaterial
</xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="parenttype">CAEModelRevision</xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="materialtype" select="@TYPE"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>
</xsl:for-each>-->
<!--End MATERIAL_MAP-->

<!-- Example: To Map all attached Materials of type

Mat1CompMaterialRevision to
input item revisions of relationship Materials to be referenced to output
CAE
Model revisions with same ( Materials ) relationship -->
<!--Begin MATERIAL_MAP-->
<!--<xsl:for-each select="$node/smn:NODES/smn:NODE/
smn:NODE_LINE[@CLASS=
&apos;Mat1CompMaterialRevision&apos; and
@TYPE=&apos;Mat1CompMaterialRevision&apos;]">
<xsl:if test="smn:NODE_LINKS/smn:NODE_LINK/@RELATIONSHIP_TYPE=
&apos;Mat1UsesMaterial&apos;">
<xsl:call-template name="CompoundMaterialRevision">
<xsl:with-param name="operationtype">REFERENCE</xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="outrelationshiptype">Mat1UsesMaterial
</xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="parenttype">CAEModelRevision</xsl:with-param>
<xsl:with-param name="materialtype" select="@TYPE"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:if>
</xsl:for-each>-->
<!--End MATERIAL_MAP-->

c. Uncomment both the material maps.

d. Save the datamapping.xml file, and upload it to the dataset attached to the item revision.

2. Locate the NodeXMLConfig.xml file.

3-132 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Map material revisions from the product to the model

The NodeXMLConfig.xml sample file is located in the TC_DATA directory. However, the file used at
runtime is managed in a CAEStructureMap dataset attached to the item revision indicated by the
CAE_datamap_files_location preference.

a. Open the NodeXMLConfig.xml file from the TC_DATA directory.

b. Search for MaterialRevision in this file.

<!--<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Mat1MaterialRevision"
TYPE="Mat1MaterialRevision">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"
TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"
TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id" NAME="ID" TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="structure_revisions"
NAME="BOM View Revisions" TYPE="Reference"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids" NAME="Project IDs"
TYPE="Runtime"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:NODE_LINKS>
<smn:NODE_LINK CLASS="ItemRevision"
RELATIONSHIP_TYPE="Mat1UsesMaterial" TYPE="ItemRevision"/>
</smn:NODE_LINKS>
</smn:NODE_LINE>-->
<!--<smn:NODE_LINE CLASS="Mat1CompMaterialRevision"
TYPE="Mat1CompMaterialRevision">
<smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_name" NAME="Name"
TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="object_desc" NAME="Description"
TYPE="Attribute"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="item_id" NAME="ID" TYPE="Runtime"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="structure_revisions"
NAME="BOM View Revisions" TYPE="Reference"/>
<smn:ATTR_NODE INTERNAL_NAME="project_ids" NAME="Project IDs"
TYPE="Runtime"/>
</smn:ATTR_NODES>
<smn:NODE_LINKS>
<smn:NODE_LINK CLASS="ItemRevision" RELATIONSHIP_TYPE=
"Mat1UsesMaterial" TYPE="ItemRevision"/>
</smn:NODE_LINKS>
</smn:NODE_LINE>-->

c. Uncomment both the Mat1MaterialRevision and Mat1CompMaterialRevision nodes.

d. Save the NodeXMLConfig.xml file, and upload it to the dataset attached to the item revision.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-133
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Define a simulation tool for exporting material revisions

To map material revisions from the product to the model:

1. In CAE Manager, from the main tool bar, click CAE Configuration→ Simulation Tool
Configuration.

2. In the SimTool-tool-ID-Root_Tool panel, click Create Simulation Tool and specify a name for the
tool you want to configure, for example, MaterialsMgmtConfigTool.

3. (Optional) Click the Input Configuration tab and select CAE Model Revision as the primary input
type.

This is required only if you want to specify additional input rules.

4. Select the Export Materials check box, and specify a file name, for example, mat.xml.

The file type can be of any format supported by the solver for exporting the material information.

This option is available only if Materials Management is installed.

5. Select one of the following options:

• Generate full MatML with no transformation to export a complete MatML export.

MatML is an extensible markup language (XML) developed especially for the interchange of
material information.

• Select Export Filter to export to a solver-specific format, for example, Catia or Ansys.
The default values in this menu are determined by the IMM_EXPORT_FILTERS preference.

Note:
Only XSLT based translators from the preference are supported in the Select Export Filter.

6. Create a primary input rule for PLM XML export. Use the CAEConfiguredDataFilesExportDefault
transfer mode to export a PLM XML file of the model structure along with the associated material
IDs.

Tip:
You can add multiple primary input rules and additional input rules to gather all the
information. The system collects material IDs for all the rules and combines them in a single
export file without repeating the material ID. This is the export file type you specified in step
4.

3-134 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Define a simulation tool for exporting material revisions

a. Select PLMXML Export in the Primary Input section and click the Add button to create a
traversal rule for exporting the primary inputs.

b. Specify a rule name and select the CAEConfiguredDataFilesExportDefault option from the
Transfer Mode menu.

c. In the File Name box, specify a name for the export file, for example, exp.xml.

d. To create the traversal rule, click OK.

7. (Optional) Specify additional inputs as appropriate. The following is only an example.

You can specify additional inputs only if you have selected an option as the primary input type. In
the following example, CAE Model Revision is specified as the primary input type in step 3.

a. Select the PLMXML Export option as the additional input and click Add to create a traversal
rule for exporting the additional inputs.

b. Specify a rule name in the Rule Name box, for example, addl_rule1.

c. Specify a file name for the export file in the File Name box, for example, addl_rule1.xml.

d. From the Transfer Mode menu, select CAEConfiguredDataFilesExportDefault.

e. Specify a traversal path as follows:

Originating Type Relation Destination Relation Destination

Object Direction Type

CAE Model CAE Source Item Revision Primary to CAE Geometry

Revision Relationship Secondary Revision

CAE Geometry Materials Item Revision Primary to Material

Revision Secondary Revision

f. To create this rule, click OK.

8. (Optional) To copy all the information from the source tool and to create a new tool by cloning the
source tool, click Clone Simulation Tool in the view toolbar.

When you clone tools, the name of the child tool is the same as that of the source and the new tool
is added as the last child of the parent tool.

9. (Optional) To export the tool configuration, from the Teamcenter command prompt, run the
cae_migrate_tool_configuration utility. To view the command line help for this utility, type
cae_migrate_tool_configuration -h on the Teamcenter command prompt.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-135
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

To import a tool configuration you have exported, run the same utility.

To create a simulation tool, follow the procedures outlined in Define simulation tools.

Create a model structure using a workflow process

Configure the workflow process for running structure maps

You (as a user with DBA privileges) can configure a workflow process to allow simulation analysts to
create model structures by using structure map rules. The workflow process uses the Dispatcher
AsyncService to process asynchronous requests from Teamcenter.

The process for configuring a workflow process is as follows:

1. Configure the Dispatcher AsyncService to activate the translator, create a Dispatcher client
access rule, and set the SOA URL field in the site object of your local site and each remote site
to which you need to send asynchronous requests.

2. Create a workflow process to specify the structure map item ID and set the execution type as
async (default value).

After the workflow process is configured, a simulation analyst can open a product structure and select
File→New→Workflow Process in CAE Manager to create a model structure using predefined structure
map rules.

Configure Dispatcher for the async mode

1. Open the translator.xml file from the Dispatcher_Root\Module\conf directory and search for
AsyncService.

2. Set the isactive attribute to true to activate this translator.

3. Edit the CHANGE_ME tags in the asyncservice.bat (Windows) or asyncservice.sh (Linux) file in
the Dispatcher_Root\Module\Translators\asyncservice directory.

Example:

set TC_ROOT=CHANGE_ME

Change to:

set TC_ROOT=D:\Siemens\Teamcenter11

If you have installed Teamcenter in the D:\Siemens\Teamcenter11 directory.

3-136 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure a workflow process for running structure maps

Similarly, change all CHANGE_ME tags in the asyncservice.bat or asyncservice.sh file.

4. Create a dispatcher client access rule.

After installing Dispatcher, you must add a rule to the access rule tree permitting the translation
service proxy user to update attributes of a DispatcherRequest object. If this access rule is not
created correctly, the dispatcher client reports errors.

5. Set SOA URL for your site.

Use the Organization application to create a site and add the middle tier system’s URL to the SOA
URL field in the site object of your local site and each remote site to which you need to send
asynchronous requests. This should have the same base value as that used to set up and configure
the middle tier and to run the Web client and Rich Client.

Example:

http://localhost:7001/tc

If you use SSL to access Teamcenter, that is, if the address starts with "https:", ensure that a proper
certificate is stored in the business logic server's trust certificate store file.

6. In the Organization application, create a user in the Teamcenter dba group with the same OS
name as your user name on the machine you are running as a Dispatcher module. This user name
is used by asyncservice for auto login.

Configure a workflow process for running structure maps

An administrator (user with DBA privileges) can configure a workflow process for simulation analysts to
create a model structure by using structure maps rules.

1. In Workflow Designer, log on as a user with DBA privileges.

2. Click File → New Root Template.

3. Specify a template name and choose Process as the template type.

4. Create a simple task and join it from Start and end it with Finish.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-137
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

5. Right-click the new task you created and select Task Properties, and click Display the Task
Handlers Panel.

6. (Optional) In the Attributes panel, select the Process in Background option. This option is
available only if the EPM_task_execution_mode preference is set to CONFIGURABLE.

If you set the EPM_task_execution_mode preference to BACKGROUND, all tasks run in the
background.

By default, it is sync mode.

7. In the Task Properties Dialog, click Display the Task Handlers Panel.

8. Select the Complete task action and select CAE-structuremap-execution-handler as the action
handler.

3-138 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure a workflow process for running structure maps

Specify arguments and values as follows.

Argument Description

-sm (Mandatory) Specifies the structure map item ID.

-revrule (Optional) Specifies the revision rule, for example, Latest Working.

-svr (Optional) Specifies the saved variant rule (SVR). If there are multiple
SVRs, use a comma (,) as a separator.
If the SVR is not available on the root of the input product item revision
you have opened, you can define the value in the following format:

• item_id::svr: The system considers the SVR available on the latest

working revision of the item to which the item_id corresponds.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-139
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Argument Description

• item_id::rev_id::svr: The system considers the SVR available on the

revision of the item to which the item_id and rev_id corresponds.

-target_owning_user (Optional) Specifies the owner of the workflow process for the resulting
CAE structure. If not specified, the current workflow process owner is
the owner of the CAE BOM.

-target_owning_group (Optional) Specifies the group name of the owning user of the
workflow process for the resulting CAE structure. If not specified, the
current workflow process owner's group is the owning group of the CAE
BOM.

9. To create the action handler, click Create.

Tip:
You can specify multiple action handlers for each structure map you want to execute and
change the value for the structure map item ID or -sm argument.

Configure file upload rules to support analysis on local desktops

Why configure file upload rules?

At some sites, not all simulation tools are integrated with Teamcenter. Simulation analysts may prefer to
run the simulation tools on their local desktops and periodically upload and download the data to or
from Teamcenter as needed.

A user with DBA privileges configures the file upload rules at the site level, the group administrator
configures them at the group level, and the simulation analyst configures them at the user level. All
types of users can use the File Upload Rules Configuration view to create file upload rules for analysts
to upload or download the analysis files to or from Teamcenter. After configuring the file upload rules,
all users can use the File Explorer view to upload or download analysis files to or from Teamcenter
based on predefined upload rules available at the site, group, or user level.

You can specify or create:

• Site name, group name, or user name.

• Primary input types, for example, item revisions.

• Dataset creation options.

• File upload rules by specifying a traversal rule. This defines the path from the input item revision to
the dataset that holds the various output files.

3-140 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Specify File Explorer options

Specify File Explorer options

1. In CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→File Explorer.

3. To specify a default working directory for analysts to upload or download files, click Browse in the
applicable platform and select the appropriate directory.

4. To specify the default file upload conflict resolution option, select one of the following:

• Upload to upload the file to Teamcenter and overwrite the file with the same file name.

• Rename and Upload to rename the file and upload it to Teamcenter.

• Skip to skip the upload of the file to Teamcenter.

5. To specify the default file download conflict resolution option, select one of the following:

• Overwrite to download the file to a local machine and overwrite the file with the same file
name.

• Rename and Upload to rename the file and download it to a local machine.

• Skip to skip the download of the file to the local machine.

6. To specify an alternate location folder for the file upload or download rule set configuration, click
Browse and select an alternate folder.

The default location is the Newstuff folder in Teamcenter. This is determined by the
CAE_file_upload_rule_set_location_folder preference.

Configure and deploy file upload rules

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose File Upload Rules
Configuration .

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-141
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

2. Select the Site, Group, or User scope option.

3. To create a file upload rule, click Create New File Upload Rule Set in the view toolbar.

4. Specify a file upload rule name in the Name box.

This is the name that appears in the File Upload Rule Set menu when the simulation analyst opens
the File Upload dialog box.

5. (Optional) Specify a description in the Description box.

6. To add a primary input type, in the Primary Input Types area, select a primary input type and click
Add .

7. In the Dataset Creation Options area, select one of the following options:

3-142 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure and deploy file upload rules

• As Needed to create datasets as needed while uploading files, using the File Explorer view.
This is the default option.

• Always to create datasets each time while uploading files, using the File Explorer view.

• Never to specify that datasets should not be created, but use existing ones that match the
configuration while uploading files, using the File Explorer view.

8. To create a file upload rule, in the File Upload Rules area, click Add to open the File Upload
Rule dialog box.

9. Specify a name for the rule in the Rule Name box.

10. Create a traversal rule to define the path from the input item revision to an item revision that holds
the various output files.

a. In the Traversal Path area, click Add to activate all options.

b. In the Originating Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option, for example,
CAE Analysis Revision.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-143
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Note:
The options available here depend on the input types you have added in the Primary
Input Types box.

c. In the Relations column, click a cell and select an appropriate option, for example,
Specifications.

d. In the Destination Object column, click a cell and select an appropriate option, for example,
Dataset.

e. In the Destination Type column, click a cell and select an appropriate option, for example,
Nastran.

The following is an example of a traversal path to create a destination type from a CAE
Analysis Revision item revision (Originating Type) to a Nastran file containing data
(Destination Type):

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Destination Type

CAE Analysis Revision Specifications Dataset Nastran

Nastran Not applicable Reference Type CAE0OP2 (*.op2)

f. In the Dataset Name Pattern box, click the Add button to add a dataset name pattern you
want to include, for example, FILENAME"-nastran".

Note:
If you do not specify a dataset-naming pattern, a new dataset is created to hold the
resulting output files. Simulation Process Management assigns a default name
comprising the item revision’s itemID and itemRev to the new dataset.

g. In the File Name Pattern box, click the Add button to add a file name pattern you want to
include, for example, *.fem.

11. (Optional) To specify multiple mapping definitions for a given file name pattern, click the Filename
to Item Revision Mapping option.

You can specify mapping information for each file extension.

The keywords supported are ITEMID, ITEMNAME, REVID, REVNAME, SEQNUM, and REVDESC.

You can use a combination of the above keywords and fixed strings in double quotes. For example,
"Mesh-"ITEMID"-"REVID.

3-144 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure and deploy file upload rules

You can use the following operators in a keyword search:

• Contains (). For example, Contains (ITEMID).

• Begins with ()

• Ends with ()

Example for item and item revision:

002868-Blade Analysis

002868/B;2-Blade Analysis Revised (Revision Description: Thermal Analysis)

The keywords resolve to the following values:

• ITEMID=002868

• ITEMNAME=Blade Analysis

• REVID=B

• REVNAME=Blade Analysis Revised

• SEQNUM=2

• REVDESC=Thermal Analysis

Examples:

• “Mesh-"REVDESC"-"REVID

• "Mesh-"ITEMNAME"-"REVID

• Contains (ITEMID)

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-145
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Note:
The keyword ITEMREVID is not supported.

12. To save the file upload rule set, click Save File Upload Rule Set in the view toolbar.

13. To clone the file upload rule set, click Clone File Upload Rule Set in the view toolbar.

14. To delete the file upload rule set, click Delete File Upload Rule Set in the view toolbar.

15. To reset the file upload rule set to the last saved state, click Reset File Upload Rule Set in the
view toolbar.

Create a file upload rule for folders

You can configure file upload rules to import a folder structure into Teamcenter.

1. In CAE Manager, click the CAE Configuration toolbar menu, and choose File Upload Rules
Configuration.

2. Select the Site, Group, or User scope option.

3. To create a file upload rule, click Create New File Upload Rule Set in the view toolbar.

3-146 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Create a file upload rule for folders

4. Specify a file upload rule name in the Name box, for example, Map Folders.

This is the name that appears in the File Upload Rule Set menu when the simulation analyst opens
the File Upload dialog box.

5. (Optional) Specify a description in the Description box.

6. To add a primary input type, in the Primary Input Types area, select a primary input type and click
Add .

7. In the Dataset Creation Options area, select:

• As Needed to create datasets as needed while uploading files, using the File Explorer view.
This is the default option.

• Always to create datasets each time while uploading files, using the File Explorer view.

• Never to specify that new datasets must not be created and that existing ones that match the
configuration while uploading files must be used, using the File Explorer view.

8. To create a file upload rule, in the File Upload Rules area, click Add to open the File Upload
Rule dialog box.

9. Specify a file upload rule name in the Rule Name box.

This is the name that appears in the File Upload Rule Set menu when the simulation analyst opens
the File Upload dialog box.

10. Click Add to create a traversal path.

Example:

Originating Type Relation Destination Object Destination Type

CAEAnalysisRevision Specifications CAE Folder CAE Folder

The system attaches a CAE Folder to another CAE Folder or to an item revision using the Has CAE
Folders relationship.

When you configure the rule, you must set the destination object and the destination type columns
in the traversal path as CAE Folder type. The file name pattern defaults to *.* for the CAE Folder
type. You cannot change this.

No additional lines are required for the traversal path. A file upload rule can contain only one rule
that maps to a given item revision type and a CAE folder.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-147
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Configure properties in dialog boxes

Configure properties in dialog boxes

You can configure the properties in the Multiple Object Save As and Multiple Object Revise dialog
boxes using the Operation Descriptor tab in Business Modeler IDE.

In BMIDE, make the following changes:

• Set the performDeepCopy property on the Item Revision to false to hide this unused property from
being displayed in the Multiple-Replace Item Revision dialog box.

• Specify a display name for the fnd0CheckOutOnRevise property in the Modify OperationInput
Property dialog box to show some user friendly text in the Multiple-Replace Item Revision dialog
box.

Configure properties in the Multi-Replace Item Revision dialog box

You can customize the properties in the Multiple-Replace Item Revision dialog box using the Options
dialog box. This dialog box is available from the View menu in CAE Manager.

1. In My Teamcenter or CAE Manager, choose Edit→Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. Choose CAE Tools→UI Configurations.

3. Customize columns in the Selected and Matching Item Revisions section of the Multiple-
Replace Item Revision dialog box.

a. Click the Replace tab.

b. From the Item Revision type selected menu, select the appropriate revision type.

By default, it is the CAE Model Revision type.

c. To customize properties in the Multi-Replace Item Revision dialog box in CAE Manager,
select the properties you want to include from the Available Properties box and move them
to the Selected Properties dialog box.

3-148 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure properties in the Multi-Replace Item Revision dialog box

The default properties in this dialog box are determined by the CAEModelRevision_Multi_-
Replace_Table_Properties site preference.

These default properties are displayed as columns in the Selected and Matching Item
Revisions section of the Multiple-Replace Item Revision dialog box.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-149
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

4. Customize options in the Search for new Item Revisions section of the Multiple-Replace Item
Revision dialog box.

a. Click the Multi-Replace Query tab.

b. From the Item Revision type selected menu, select the appropriate revision type.

By default, it is CAE Model Revision type.

c. To customize properties in the Multi-Replace Item Revision dialog box in CAE Manager,
select the properties you want to include from the Available Properties box and move them
to the Selected Properties dialog box.

The default properties in this dialog box are determined by the CAEModelRevision_Multi_-
Replace_Search_Properties site preference.

The properties that are configured for search are displayed in the Selected and Matching
Item Revisions section of the Multiple-Replace Item Revision dialog box.

Run scripts to quickly set up sample configurations

Set up sample configurations

After you install the Simulation Process Management template on a virtual machine or a sandbox
environment, you can run scripts to quickly set up sample configurations. This provides an easy setup for
presales or customers who want to explore the Simulation Process Management capabilities.

These scripts are available from the TC_DATA\tcsim\setup directory and you can run them from the
Teamcenter command prompt:

Script name and usage example Description

tcsim_quick_setup.pl -u=DBAUserName - This script calls the following scripts:

p=DBAUserPassword -pf=DBAUserPasswordFile
• tcsim_setup_user.pl

• tcsim_setup_config.pl

• tcsim_setup_example_configs.pl

3-150 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Set up sample configurations

Script name and usage example Description

Note:
A user with system administrator or group
administrator privileges must run this script.

tcsim_setup_user.pl -u=DBAUserName - Creates a Sam Analyst user under the

p=DBAUserPassword -pf=DBAUserPasswordFile - Engineering group with the Analyst role. The
simusername=UserNameToCreate - User ID of this user is sam.
simuserpw=UserPasswordForCreatedUser
Note:
A user with system administrator or group
administrator privileges must run this script.

tcsim_setup_config.pl -u=UserName - This script imports:

p=UserPassword -pf=UserPasswordFile
• Data map configurations.

• Tool launch client configurations.

tcsim_setup_example_configs.pl -u=UserName - This script imports:

p=UserPassword -pf=UserPasswordFile
• Sample structure map configurations.

• Sample tool configurations

• Sample CAE package configurations.

• Sample derivative rules at the site level.

• Sample model and analysis dashboard

configurations at the site level.

• Sample file upload rule configurations at the

site level.

For more information on running these scripts, from the Teamcenter command prompt, type the script
name followed by -h or -help, for example, tcsim_quick_setup.pl-h.

After running these scripts, you can log on to the Teamcenter rich client as a sam user and use the
sample configuration to run the Simulation Process Management application.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-151
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

After running the tcsim_quick_setup.pl script, in CAE Manager, click CAE Configuration on the main
toolbar and choose Simulation Tool Configuration. The SIMTOOLS configuration view displays the
default preprocessors, solvers, postprocessors, and other utilities.

You can also log on to Active Workspace as a sam user to open the Analyst workspace. This is the
default workspace for this user.

How is the CAE sample data packaged?

The CAE data package contains the PLM XML files you want to import. The package contains the CAD
and other data and a file_import_order.txt file in a folder.

When you import the CAE data using rich client or Active Workspace, the package folders are
compressed separately and selected as input.

The first line of the file_import_order.txt file is TopLevelFolder:Top Level Folder Name. The top level
folder is one of the folders imported as a part of the CAE data package and is pasted under the Home
folder of the user or the selected folder in Teamcenter or Active Workspace in the case of UI import.

The file_import_order.txt file has the PLM XML file names in the sequence in which they are imported.
The last PLM XML file specified is always the file with the folder structure data.

3-152 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Import the sample CAE data

You can use different transfer modes to export the data and the folder structure, respectively. To export:

• The PLM XML files while creating the CAE data package, use the
CAEConfiguredDataFilesExportDefault transfer mode.

• The folder structure in PLM XML, use the CAEExportFolderWith1LevelContent transfer mode.

If you use the cae_import_data utility, the system imports the CAE data packages to the directory you
specify in the import_directory parameter.

Import the sample CAE data

Using the rich client

1. In CAE Manager, select a folder from the Home view.

2. Click Tools→Import CAE Data.

3. To import the data package, in the Import CAE Data dialog box, click Add and browse to the
location containing the sample data.

The data package is imported asynchronously. The system displays a notification sent through
email with the log details when the import is complete.

4. Access your Mailbox to find the email notification with the log details.

The data is imported into the folder you selected in step 1.

Using Active Workspace

1. Click FOLDERS and select a folder.

2. Click New > Import CAE Data.

3. Click Choose file and browse to the location containing the sample data.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-153
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

Tip:
If you use Google Chrome, you can drag and drop the file. This action is not supported in
Internet Explorer.

4. Click Alerts to find the notification with the log details.

The data is imported into the folder you selected in step 1.

Using the cae_import_data utility

You can import sample CAE data from the operating system to Teamcenter using the cae_import_data
utility. For more information about using this utility, run the cae_import_data -h command from the
Teamcenter command prompt.

Quick start for configuring Simcenter HEEDS

Process flow for HEEDS analysis

This quick start is designed to help the lead or the expert HEEDS user configure simulation tools and the
HEEDS analysts to launch the preconfigured simulation tools.

These topics provide only a high-level overview of how to configure and launch simulation tools. For
more information, see the respective topics.

• Configure simulation tools to launch preprocessors, solvers, and postprocessors

• For more information about launching preconfigured simulation tools, see Launch simulation tools in
Using Simulation Process Management on Rich Client in the Teamcenter help.

Sets up the sample tool configurations by running the

tcsim_quick_setup.pl script.
Simulation administrator
The lead or an expert HEEDS user can use these default
tools as a starting point to configure tools.

Creates a HEEDS project from scratch.

1. Creates the CAE MDO Template business object in

CAE Manager.
Lead or an expert HEEDS user 2. Creates the HEEDS project by running the Simcenter
HEEDS - Create or Modify Template tool.

Updates the metadata of the existing CAE MDO template

in Teamcenter.

3-154 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Create or modify a HEEDS project

1. Creates the CAE MDO Template business object in

CAE Manager.
2. Updates the HEEDS project by running the Simcenter
HEEDS - Extract Template Info tool.

Releases the CAE MDO Template business object..

1. Opens the CAE MDO Template business object in CAE

Manager.
2. Uses the TCM Release Process to start the workflow
process and releases the business object.

Extracts the information for the analysis.

1. Creates the CAE MDO Analysis business object in CAE

Manager in the context of the released CAE MDO
Template business object
2. Extracts information by running the preconfigured
Simcenter HEEDS - Extract Study Info tool.
3. (After the tool launch is complete) Searches for the
input file and attaches it to the CAE MDO Analysis
business object you created.

Executes the analysis in an interactive mode or a non-

interactive mode (batch process).

HEEDS analyst 1. Opens the CAE MDO Analysis business object.

2. Executes the analysis in an interactive mode by
running the preconfigured Simcenter HEEDS -
Execute Analysis tool.
OR
Executes the analysis in a non-interactive mode by
running the preconfigured Simcenter HEEDS -
Execute Analysis (Batch) tool.

Post processes the results.

1. Opens the CAE MDO Analysis business object.

2. Post processes the results by running the
preconfigured Simcenter HEEDS - Post Processing
tool.

Create or modify a HEEDS project

The following procedures are to be performed by a lead or an expert HEEDS user.

• Create the CAE MDO template

• Run a preconfigured tool to update the CAE MDO template

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-155
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Run a preconfigured tool to update the metadata of the existing CAE MDO template
• Release the CAE MDO template

Create the CAE MDO template

1. In CAE Manager, select a folder in the Home view, for example, Newstuff.

2. Click File → New → CAE Item.

3. In the New CAE Item Wizard dialog box, select CAE MDO Template, and click Next.

4. Specify a name and click Finish.

Run a preconfigured tool to update the CAE MDO template

You can use the Simcenter HEEDS - Create or Modify Template tool when you want to create a HEEDS
project from scratch. This tool launches the HEEDS application and creates a project (*.heeds) file in the
HEEDS application.

You can use also this tool to modify an existing template. It launches the HEEDS application and
modifies the configuration. After the user saves the configuration in HEEDS, all the information is stored
in the *.heeds file. When you exit the HEEDS application, the CAE MDO template objects are updated in
Teamcenter. You must not update the MDO template information from Teamcenter.

For more information about this tool, click Simulation Tools → Simulation Tool Help → MDO →
Create or Modify Template, and click Show Detailed Description.

1. Click CAE Configuration → Simulation Tool Configuration on the main toolbar.

2. Select SIMTOOLversionMDO, expand it, select the SIMTOOLversionSimcenter HEEDS - Create or

Modify Template tool, and click Release Simulation Tool on the SIMTOOLS configuration view.

3. Open the CAE MDO Template you created in step 1 in a separate view by double-clicking it.

4. Select the item revision of the CAE MDO Template, click Simulation Tools → MDO → Simcenter
HEEDS - Create or Modify Template.

5. In the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box, specify the appropriate information or select the
appropriate options.

For more information, see Launch simulation tools in Using Simulation Process Management on
Rich Client in the Teamcenter collection.

Run a preconfigured tool to update the metadata of the existing CAE MDO template

Update the metadata of an existing template in Teamcenter.

3-156 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Extract the information required for the analysis and perform the HEEDS analysis

If you have already created a HEED project (*.heeds file) and you want to manage the data in
Teamcenter, you can use the Simcenter HEEDS - Extract Template Info tool.

For more information about this tool, click Simulation Tools → Simulation Tool Help → MDO →
Extract Template Info, and click Show Detailed Description.

1. Click CAE Configuration → Simulation Tool Configuration on the main toolbar.

2. Select SIMTOOLversionMDO, expand it, select the SIMTOOLversionSimcenter HEEDS - Extract

Template Info tool, and click Release Simulation Tool on the SIMTOOLS configuration view.

3. Open the CAE MDO Template you created in step 1 in a separate view by double-clicking it.

4. Select the item revision of the CAE MDO Template, click Simulation Tools → MDO →Simcenter
HEEDS - Extract Template Info.

5. In the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box, specify the appropriate information or select the
appropriate options.

For more information, see Launch simulation tools in Using Simulation Process Management on
Rich Client in the Teamcenter collection.

Release the CAE MDO template

1. Open the CAE MDO Template you created in step 1 in a separate view by double-clicking it.

2. Choose File→New→Workflow Process to open the New Process dialog box.

The Process Name box contains the revision name automatically. You can accept the default name
or enter a different name for this process.

3. In the Process Template list, select TCM Release Process.

Your action is not required for the Add Status task on the Process Template tab. The system
performs the task, which assigns the TCM Released status.

4. Click OK to initiate the workflow process.

Extract the information required for the analysis and perform the HEEDS
analysis

The following procedures are to be performed by a HEEDS analyst.

• Create the CAE MDO analysis business object

• Extract the information required for the analysis

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-157
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Perform the HEEDS analysis in an interactive mode or a non-interactive mode (batch process)

• Post process the results

Create the CAE MDO analysis business object

You must create the CAE MDO Analysis business object based on the CAE MDO Template released by
the lead or an expert HEEDS user.

1. In CAE Manager, select a folder in the Home view, for example, Newstuff.

2. Click File → New → CAE Item.

3. In the New CAE Item Wizard dialog box, select CAE MDO Analysis and click Next.

4. Specify a name and click Finish.

Extract the information required for the analysis

You can use the Simcenter HEEDS - Extract Study Info tool to extract the information required for the
analysis.

After the tool is run, the CAE MDO Analysis business object is updated in Teamcenter.

For more information about this tool, click Simulation Tools → Simulation Tool Help → MDO →
Extract Study Info, and click Show Detailed Description.

1. Click CAE Configuration → Simulation Tool Configuration on the main toolbar.

2. Select SIMTOOLversionMDO, expand it, select the SIMTOOLversionSimcenter HEEDS - Extract

Study Info tool, and click Release Simulation Tool on the SIMTOOLS configuration view.

3. Open the CAE MDO Analysis business object you created in step 1 in a separate view by double-
clicking it.

4. Select the item revision of the CAE MDO Template business object, click Simulation Tools →
MDO → Simcenter HEEDS - Extract Study Info.

5. In the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box, specify the appropriate information or select the
appropriate options.

For more information, see Launch simulation tools in Using Simulation Process Management on
Rich Client in the Teamcenter collection.

6. After the tool launch is complete, search for the input file and attach the input file to the CAE MDO
Analysis business object you created in step 1.

3-158 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Extract the information required for the analysis and perform the HEEDS analysis

The location of this file depends on the scratch location you provided while launching simulation
tools.

Perform the HEEDS analysis in an interactive mode or a non-interactive mode (batch

process)

You can perform the HEEDS analysis in an interactive mode by using the Simcenter HEEDS - Execute
Analysis tool or in a non-interactive mode by using the Simcenter HEEDS - Execute Analysis (Batch)
tool.

For more information about this tool, click Simulation Tools → Simulation Tool Help → MDO →
Execute Analysis or Execute Analysis (Batch), and click Show Detailed Description.

1. Click CAE Configuration → Simulation Tool Configuration on the main toolbar.

2. Select SIMTOOLversionMDO, expand it, and select one of the following tools, and click Release
Simulation Tool on the SIMTOOLS configuration view.

• To perform the HEEDS analysis in interactive mode: SIMTOOLversionSimcenter HEEDS -

Execute Analysis

• To perform the HEEDS analysis in non interactive mode: SIMTOOLversionSimcenter HEEDS -

Execute Analysis (Batch)

3. Open the CAE MDO Analysis business object you created in step 1 in a separate view by double-
clicking it.

Ensure that the input file after running Simcenter HEEDS - Extract Study Info is attached to the
CAE MDO Analysis business object as described in 6.

4. Select the item revision of the CAE MDO Template business object, click Simulation Tools →
MDO → Simcenter HEEDS - Execute Analysis or Simcenter HEEDS - Execute Analysis (Batch).

5. In the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box, specify the appropriate information or select the
appropriate options.

For more information, see Launch simulation tools in Using Simulation Process Management on
Rich Client in the Teamcenter documentation.

Post process the results

You can post process the results by using the Simcenter HEEDS - Post Processing tool.

The system updates the CAE MDO Analysis business object after the user exits the HEEDS application.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-159
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

For more information about this tool, click Simulation Tools → Simulation Tool Help → MDO → Post
Processing, and click Show Detailed Description.

1. Click CAE Configuration → Simulation Tool Configuration on the main toolbar.

2. Select SIMTOOLversionMDO, expand it, select the SIMTOOLversionSimcenter HEEDS - Post

Processing tool, and click Release Simulation Tool on the SIMTOOLS configuration view.

3. Open the CAE MDO Analysis business object you created in step 1 in a separate view by double-
clicking it.

4. Select the item revision of the CAE MDO Template business object, click Simulation Tools →
MDO → Simcenter HEEDS - Post Processing.

5. In the Launch Simulation Tool dialog box, specify the appropriate information or select the
appropriate options.

For more information, see Launch simulation tools in Using Simulation Process Management on
Rich Client in the Teamcenter collection.

Configure for Active Workspace

Configure the Simulation-related objects table

You (as a system administrator) can configure the fields in the Related Simulation Objects table of the
Simulation tab in Active Workspace.

You can edit style sheets in the Teamcenter rich client to add new properties and expose the new fields
in the graphical user interface (GUI) for the following types:

• CAE Analysis Revision

• CAE Model Revision

• CAE Geometry Revision

By default, the Related Simulation Objects section displays the Object, Type, Relation, Release
Status, Date Released, and Owner fields.

The style sheets referred to here are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering
datasets. The following is an example of how to edit two style sheets for the CAE Analysis Revision type
to add the object_name property and expose the Name field in the Related Simulation Objects
section.

You can also add custom properties for the CAE Analysis Revision type.

3-160 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Configure the Simulation-related objects table

1. To search for style sheets related to the CAE Analysis Revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich
client), type Cae1CAEAna*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

Note:
Only a DBA user can modify style sheets.

The search results show Cae1CAEAnalysisRevSummary and

Cae1CAEAnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

In Active Workspace, users can select a CAE Analysis Revision type from the Results page and
click the Simulation tab to view the details.

Alternatively, they can select a CAE Analysis Revision type from the Results page, click Open to
open it separately, and click the Simulation tab to view the details.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-161
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

The Cae1CAEAnalysisRevSummary and the Cae1CAEAnalysisRevSummaryForShow-

ObjectLocation style sheets determine the fields displayed in the Related Simulation Objects
section for the respective selection.

2. To view the style sheet, select Cae1CAEAnalysisRevSummary from the Search Results view, and
click the Viewer tab.

3. Edit the tc_xrt_Analysis section in the style sheet to add the new object_name property and
expose the Name field in the GUI.

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_RelatedSimulationObjects" >

<htmlPanel id="com.siemens.splm.client.tcsim.xrtSimulationSublocation" />
</section>
<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<objectSet source="TC_CAE_Include.CAEAnalysisRevision,
S2P:TC_CAE_Include.CAEAnalysisRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="listDisplay">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<!-- ******** Your customization goes here ******** -->
<property name="object_name"/>
<!-- ******** End of customization ******** -->
<property name="relation"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>

3-162 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision

<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>
<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<objectSet source="TC_CAE_Results.CAEResultRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="listDisplay">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<!-- ******** Your customization goes here ******** -->
<property name="object_name"/>
<!-- ******** End of customization ******** -->
<property name="relation"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

4. To save your changes, click Apply.

In Active Workspace, select a CAE Analysis Revision type from the Results page and click the
Simulation tab to view the details.

The Related Simulation Objects table displays the new Name field.

Similarly, to search for style sheets related to the CAE Analysis Revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich
client), select the Cae1CAEAnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation sheet from the Search
Results view. Click the Viewer tab and repeat steps 3 and 4.

Edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the Simulation tab

Expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision

You (as a user with dba privileges) can edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the context
of the product revision and configure traversal paths to define how to traverse the data structure and
specify which relationships are of interest and what should be done when these relationships are
encountered. For example, you can define a traversal path from a primary item type, such as an analysis
revision, to the solver-specific data deck (CAESolver) and from CAESolver to the file to be exported.

The following is an example of the generic simulation data model.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-163
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

In Active Workspace, users can select an item revision type from the Results page and view the details in
the Simulation tab. Alternatively, they can select an item revision type from the Results page, click
Open to open it separately, and view the details in the Simulation tab. The Cae1ItemRevSummary
and the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheets determine the objects displayed
in the Related Simulation Objects table for the respective selection.

You can edit style sheets to add a new traversal path and expose the new objects or edit the default
traversal path to hide some objects in the graphical user interface (GUI). The style sheets referred to
here are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering datasets and you can edit
them using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client.

To expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision:

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummary style sheet and add custom geometry, model, analysis, and result
revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom revisions to specify traversal
paths.

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet and add custom geometry,

model, analysis, and result revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom
revisions to specify traversal paths.

The following is an example of how to edit the style sheet to customize the GUI to display model, result,
geometry, and analysis revisions in the Related Simulation Objects table.

Edit style sheets using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client

1. In Teamcenter rich client, sign in as a dba user.

3-164 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision

2. Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummary style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1ItemRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1ItemRevSummary and

Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1ItemRevSummary from the Search Results view, and
click the Viewer tab.

3. Add model revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Model

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Model Revision,

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Geometry Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Model Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Model section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Model">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-165
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Model">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Target ^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Tip:
You can specify S2P$ as the prefix before a relation to specify that the traversal path is
from the secondary object to the primary object, ^^ as an AND operator between two
paths, and # as the separator between the two segments of the traversal path.

4. Add result revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Result

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Geometry Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Model Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Results)

3-166 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision

-> CAE Result Revision,

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Model Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Results)
-> CAE Result Revision,

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Geometry Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Results)
-> CAE Result Revision,

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Target) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Results)
-> CAE Result Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results)

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-167
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Result section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision"

sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEAnalysisRevision

3-168 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision

#TC_CAE_Results

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

5. Add geometry revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Geometry

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Geometry Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Geometry section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-169
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

6. Add analysis revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Analysis

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Geometry Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Model Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision,

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Geometry Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Analysis Revision,

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target) CAE Model Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision,

3-170 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the product revision

Item Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Target) CAE Analysis Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEModelRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Analysis section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-171
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining

^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEGeometryRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Source
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target:CAEModelRevision#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Target)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

7. To save your changes, click Apply.

8. To view the customized revisions, search for an item revision type in Active Workspace, select it
from the Results page, and click the Simulation tab to view the details. The Related Simulation
Objects table displays the customized model, result, geometry, and analysis revisions.

9. Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1ItemRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1ItemRevSummary and

Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation from the

Search Results view, and click the Viewer tab.

c. Repeat steps 3 through 7.

d. To view the customized revisions, search for an item revision type in Active Workspace, select
it from the Results page, click Open to open it separately, and click the Simulation tab to
view the details. The Related Simulation Objects table displays the customized model, result,
geometry, and analysis revisions.

3-172 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the geometry revision

Expose custom revision types in the context of the geometry revision

You (as a user with dba privileges) can edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the context
of the product revision and configure traversal paths to define how to traverse the data structure and
specify which relationships are of interest and what should be done when these relationships are
encountered. For example, you can define a traversal path from a primary item type, such as an analysis
revision, to the solver-specific data deck (CAESolver) and from CAESolver to the file to be exported.

The following is an example of the generic simulation data model.

In Active Workspace, users can select a geometry revision from the Results page and view the details in
the Simulation tab. Alternatively, they can select a geometry revision from the Results page, click Open
to open it separately, and view the details in the Simulation tab. The Cae1GeometryRevSummary
and the Cae1GeometryRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheets determine the objects
displayed in the Related Simulation Objects table for the respective selection.

You can edit style sheets to add a new traversal path and expose the new objects or edit the default
traversal path to hide some objects in the graphical user interface (GUI). The style sheets referred to
here are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering datasets and you can edit
them using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client.

The following is an example of how to edit the style sheet to customize the GUI to display product,
model, analysis, and result revisions in the Related Simulation Objects table.

To expose custom revision types in the context of the geometry revision:

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-173
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummary style sheet and add customized product, model, analysis, and result
revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom revisions to specify traversal
paths.

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet and add customized product,

model, analysis, and result revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom
revisions to specify traversal paths.

Edit style sheets using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client

1. In Teamcenter rich client, sign in as a dba user.

2. Edit the Cae1GeometryRevSummary style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1GeometryRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1GeometryRevSummary and

Cae1GeometryRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1GeometryRevSummary from the Search Results view,
and click the Viewer tab.

3. Add product revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Product

CAE Geometry Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)

-> Item Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Target)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Product section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

3-174 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the geometry revision

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Target)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

4. Add model revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Model

CAEGeometryRevision
<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAEModelRevision

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-175
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Model section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Model">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Model">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

3-176 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the geometry revision

Tip:
You can specify S2P$ as the prefix before a relation to specify that the traversal path is
from the secondary object to the primary object, ^^ as an AND operator between two
paths, and # as the separator between the two segments of the traversal path.

5. Add analysis revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Analysis

CAE Geometry Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Analysis Revision,

CAE Geometry Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Model Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source ^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Analysis section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-177
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

6. Add result revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Result

CAE Geometry Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Analysis Revision
(TC_CAE_Results)
-> CAE Result Revision,

CAE Geometry Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Source) CAE Model Revision
<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Results)
-> CAE Result Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.

3-178 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the geometry revision

(S2P$TC_CAE_Source:
CAEAnalysisRevision#TC_CAE_Results
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Result section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<!–- ********** Start of customization ********** -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Source:
CAEAnalysisRevision#TC_CAE_Results
^^S2P$TC_CAE_Source:CAEModelRevision
#S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results)"
<!–- ********** End of customization ********** -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

7. To save your changes, click Apply.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-179
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

8. To view the customized revisions, search for a geometry revision type in Active Workspace, select it
from the Results page, and click the Simulation tab to view the details. The Related Simulation
Objects table displays the customized product, model, result, and analysis revisions.

9. Edit the Cae1GeometryRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1GeometryRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1GeometryRevSummary and

Cae1GeometryRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1GeometryRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation from

the Search Results view, and click the Viewer tab.

c. Repeat steps 3 through 7.

d. To view the customized revisions, search for a geometry revision type in Active Workspace,
select it from the Results page, click Open to open it separately, and click the Simulation
tab to view the details. The Related Simulation Objects table displays the customized
product, model, result, and analysis revisions.

Expose custom revision types in the context of the model revision

You (as a user with dba privileges) can edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the context
of the product revision and configure traversal paths to define how to traverse the data structure and
specify which relationships are of interest and what should be done when these relationships are
encountered. For example, you can define a traversal path from a primary item type, such as an analysis
revision, to the solver-specific data deck (CAESolver) and from CAESolver to the file to be exported.

The following is an example of the generic simulation data model.

3-180 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the model revision

In Active Workspace, users can select a model revision from the Results page and view the details in the
Simulation tab. Alternatively, they can select a model revision type from the Results page, click Open
to open it separately, and view the details in the Simulation tab. The Cae1ModelRevSummary and
the Cae1ModelRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheets determine the objects displayed in
the Related Simulation Objects table for the respective selection.

You can edit style sheets to add a new traversal path and expose the new objects or edit the default
traversal path to hide some objects in the graphical user interface (GUI). The style sheets referred to
here are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering datasets and you can edit
them using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client.

The following is an example of how to edit the style sheet to customize the GUI to display product,
geometry, analysis, and result revisions in the Related Simulation Objects table.

To expose custom revision types in the context of the model revision:

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummary style sheet and add customized product, geometry, analysis, and
result revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom revisions to specify
traversal paths.

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet and add customized product,

geometry, analysis, and result revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom
revisions to specify traversal paths.

Edit style sheets using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client

1. In Teamcenter rich client, sign in as a dba user.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-181
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

2. Edit the Cae1ModelRevSummary style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1ModelRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1ModelRevSummary and

Cae1ModelRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1ModelRevSummary from the Search Results view, and
click the Viewer tab.

3. Add product revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Product

CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source)

-> CAE Geometry Revision(TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)

-> Item Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Target)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Product section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>

3-182 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the model revision

<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
"Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Target)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Tip:
You can specify S2P$ as the prefix before a relation to specify that the traversal path is
from the secondary object to the primary object, ^^ as an AND operator between two
paths, and # as the separator between the two segments of the traversal path.

4. Add geometry revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Geometry

CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source)

-> CAE Geometry Revision

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-183
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(TC_CAE_Source)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Geometry section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.
CAEGeometryRevision.(TC_CAE_Source)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

5. Add analysis revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

3-184 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the model revision

/* Construct Query to get Analysis

CAE Model Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Defining)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Analysis section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Defining)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-185
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

</objectSet>
</section>

6. Add result revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Result

CAE Model Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Defining) CAE Analysis Revision
(TC_CAE_Results)
-> CAE Result Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Results)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Result section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<!–- ************* start of customization ************* -->

3-186 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the analysis revision

<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Defining:CAEAnalysisRevision#TC_CAE_Results)"
<!–- ************* end of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

7. To save your changes, click Apply.

8. To view the customized revisions, search for a model revision type in Active Workspace, select it
from the Results page, and click the Simulation tab to view the details. The Related Simulation
Objects table displays the customized product, result, geometry, and analysis revisions.

9. Edit the Cae1ModelRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1ModelRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1ModelRevSummary and

Cae1ModelRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1ModelRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation from the

Search Results view, and click the Viewer tab.

c. Repeat steps 3 through 7.

d. To view the customized revisions, search for a model revision type in Active Workspace, select
it from the Results page, click Open to open it separately, and click the Simulation tab to
view the details. The Related Simulation Objects table displays the customized product,
result, geometry, and analysis revisions.

Expose custom revision types in the context of the analysis revision

You (as a user with dba privileges) can edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the context
of the product revision and configure traversal paths to define how to traverse the data structure and
specify which relationships are of interest and what should be done when these relationships are
encountered. For example, you can define a traversal path from a primary item type, such as an analysis
revision, to the solver-specific data deck (CAESolver) and from CAESolver to the file to be exported.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-187
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

The following is an example of the generic simulation data model.

In Active Workspace, users can select an analysis revision from the Results page and view the details in
the Simulation tab. Alternatively, they can select an analysis revision from the Results page, click Open
to open it separately, and view the details in the Simulation tab. The Cae1AnalysisRevSummary
and the Cae1AnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheets determine the objects
displayed in the Related Simulation Objects table for the respective selection.

You can edit style sheets to add a new traversal path and expose the new objects or edit the default
traversal path to hide some objects in the graphical user interface (GUI). The style sheets referred to
here are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering datasets and you can edit
them using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client.

To expose custom revision types in the context of the analysis revision:

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummary style sheet and add customized product, geometry, model, and
result revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom revisions to specify
traversal paths.

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet and add customized product,

geometry, model, and result revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom
revisions to specify traversal paths.

The following is an example of how to edit the style sheet to customize the GUI to display product,
geometry, model, and result revisions in the Related Simulation Objects table.

3-188 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the analysis revision

Edit style sheets using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client

1. In Teamcenter rich client, sign in as a dba user.

2. Edit the Cae1AnalysisRevSummary style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1AnalysisRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1AnalysisRevSummary and

Cae1AnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1AnalysisRevSummary from the Search Results view, and
click the Viewer tab.

3. Add product revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Product

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)

-> CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source)
-> CAE Geometry Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)

-> CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Source)

-> CAE Geometry Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Target)-> Item Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Target

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-189
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

^^TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Target)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Product section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision#TC_CAE_Target
^^TC_CAE_Target)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>

3-190 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the analysis revision

</objectSet>
</section>

Tip:
You can specify S2P$ as the prefix before a relation to specify that the traversal path is
from the secondary object to the primary object, ^^ as an AND operator between two
paths, and # as the separator between the two segments of the traversal path.

4. Add geometry revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Geometry

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)

-> CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source)
-> CAE Geometry Revision,

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Source)

-> CAE Geometry Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision#TC_CAE_Source
^^TC_CAE_Source)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Geometry section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-191
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^TC_CAE_Source)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

5. Add analysis revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Analysis

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Include)

-> CAE Analysis Revision,

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Include)

<- CAE Analysis Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(TC_CAE_Include^^S2P$TC_CAE_Include)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Analysis section of the style sheet.

3-192 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the analysis revision

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision.
(TC_CAE_Include^^S2P$TC_CAE_Include)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

6. Add result revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Result

CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Results)

-> CAE Result Revision

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-193
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision.
(TC_CAE_Results)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Result section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEResultRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Result">
<!–- ************* Start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.
CAEResultRevision.(TC_CAE_Results)"
<!–- ************* End of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

7. To save your changes, click Apply.

3-194 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision

8. To view the customized revisions, search for an analysis revision type in Active Workspace, select it
from the Results page, and click the Simulation tab to view the details. The Related Simulation
Objects table displays the customized product, model, result, and geometry revisions.

9. Edit the Cae1AnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1AnalysisRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1AnalysisRevSummary and

Cae1AnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1AnalysisRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation from the

Search Results view, and click the Viewer tab.

c. Repeat steps 3 through 7.

d. To view the customized revisions, search for an analysis revision type in Active Workspace,
select it from the Results page, click Open to open it separately, and click the Simulation
tab to view the details. The Related Simulation Objects table displays the customized
product, model, result, and geometry revisions.

Expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision

You (as a user with dba privileges) can edit style sheets to expose custom revision types in the context
of the product revision and configure traversal paths to define how to traverse the data structure and
specify which relationships are of interest and what should be done when these relationships are
encountered. For example, you can define a traversal path from a primary item type, such as an analysis
revision, to the solver-specific data deck (CAESolver) and from CAESolver to the file to be exported.

The following is an example of the generic simulation data model.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-195
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

In Active Workspace, users can select a result revision from the Results page and view the details in the
Simulation tab. Alternatively, they can select a result revision from the Results page, click Open to
open it separately, and view the details in the Simulation tab. The Cae1ResultRevSummary and the
Cae1ResultRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheets determine the objects displayed in the
Related Simulation Objects table for the respective selection.

You can edit style sheets to add a new traversal path and expose the new objects or edit the default
traversal path to hide some objects in the graphical user interface (GUI). The style sheets referred to
here are XML documents stored in Teamcenter XMLStylesheetRendering datasets and you can edit
them using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client.

To expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision:

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummary style sheet and add customized product, geometry, model, and
analysis revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these custom revisions to specify
traversal paths.

• Edit the Cae1ItemRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet and add customized product,

geometry, model, and analysis revisions. In addition, create construct queries for each of these
custom revisions to specify traversal paths.

The following is an example of how to edit the style sheet to customize the GUI to display product,
geometry, model, and analysis revisions in the Related Simulation Objects table.

Edit style sheets using the Viewer tab in Teamcenter rich client

1. In Teamcenter rich client, sign in as a dba user.

3-196 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision

2. Edit the Cae1ResultRevSummary style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1ResultRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1ResultRevSummary and

Cae1ResultRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1ResultRevSummary from the Search Results view, and
click the Viewer tab.

3. Add product revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Product

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)
-> CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source)
-> CAE Geometry Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)
-> CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Source)
-> CAE Geometry Revision (TC_CAE_Source/TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision,

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Target)
-> Item Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-197
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

(S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Target)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Product section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Product">
<!–- ************* start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.ItemRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision

3-198 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision

#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Source:CAEGeometryRevision
#TC_CAE_Target^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Target)"
<!–- ************* end of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Tip:
You can specify S2P$ as the prefix before a relation to specify that the traversal path is
from the secondary object to the primary object, ^^ as an AND operator between two
paths, and # as the separator between the two segments of the traversal path.

4. Add geometry revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Geometry

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)
-> CAE Model Revision (TC_CAE_Source)
-> CAE Geometry Revision,

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Source)
-> CAE Geometry Revision

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-199
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Source)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Geometry section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Geometry">
<!–- ************* start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEGeometryRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Defining:CAEModelRevision
#TC_CAE_Source^^S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision
#TC_CAE_Source)"
<!–- ************* end of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

3-200 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision

5. Add model revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Model

CAE Result Revision

<-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision (TC_CAE_Defining)
-> CAE Model Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision#TC_CAE_Defining)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Model section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Model">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Model">
<!–- ************* start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEModelRevision.
(S2P$TC_CAE_Results:CAEAnalysisRevision#TC_CAE_Defining)"
<!–- ************* end of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-201
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

6. Add analysis revisions to the style sheet.

a. Create a construct query.

Example:

/* Construct Query to get Analysis

CAE Result Revision <-(TC_CAE_Results) CAE Analysis Revision

*/

Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.
CAEAnalysisRevision.(S2P$TC_CAE_Results)

b. Edit the objectSet source properties in the tc_xrt_Analysis section of the style sheet.

Default object source:

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.CAEAnalysisRevision"
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

Change to:

3-202 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 Expose custom revision types in the context of the result revision

<section titleKey="tc_xrt_Analysis">
<!–- ************* start of customization ************* -->
<objectSet source="Cae1SimulationSearchProvider.
CAEAnalysisRevision.(S2P$TC_CAE_Results)"
<!–- ************* end of customization ************* -->
sortdirection="ascending" sortby="object_string"
defaultdisplay="tableDisplay" maxRowCount="5">
<tableDisplay>
<property name="object_string"/>
<property name="object_type"/>
<property name="release_status_list"/>
<property name="date_released"/>
<property name="owning_user"/>
</tableDisplay>
</objectSet>
</section>

7. To save your changes, click Apply.

8. To view the customized revisions, search for a result revision type in Active Workspace, select it
from the Results page, and click the Simulation tab to view the details. The Related Simulation
Objects table displays the customized product, geometry, model, and analysis revisions.

9. Edit the Cae1ResultRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation style sheet.

a. To search for style sheets related to the item revision type, in My Teamcenter (rich client),
type Cae1ResultRevSummary*, select Dataset type, and perform a search.

The search results show Cae1ResultRevSummary and

Cae1ResultRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation.

b. To view the style sheet, select Cae1ResultRevSummaryForShowObjectLocation from the

Search Results view, and click the Viewer tab.

c. Repeat steps 3 through 7.

d. To view the customized revisions, search for a result revision type in Active Workspace, select
it from the Results page, click Open to open it separately, and click the Simulation tab to
view the details. The Related Simulation Objects table displays the customized product,
geometry, model, and analysis revisions.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 3-203
© 2020 Siemens
 3. Configuring Simulation Process Management

3-204 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-1
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

cae_configure_packages
Configures CAE package preferences and overwrites the existing preference values.

This utility creates items and sets the preferences based on a user’s privileges. It creates and sets site-
level preferences for a DBA user, creates and sets group level preferences for the group administrator,
and creates and sets user level preferences for all end users.

SYNTAX

cae_configure_packages
[-u=dba_user]
[-p=password]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally a user with DBA privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g

4-2 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_configure_packages

Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-h
Displays help for this utility.

EXAMPLE

cae_configure_packages -u=UserName -p=Password -g=Group

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-3
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

cae_convert_package_configuration
This utility converts the legacy CAE Package configuration to the new configuration.

Note:
Do not run this utility multiple times as this results in the creation of multiple CAE configuration
objects. That user should run this utility only once to convert the legacy package configurations.

SYNTAX

cae_convert_package_configuration
[-u=dba_user]
[-p=password]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g
Specifies the group associated with the user.

4-4 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_convert_package_configuration

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-h
Displays help for this utility.

SAMPLE USAGE

cae_convert_package_configuration
-u=dba_user
-p=password -pf=password-file -g=dba -h

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-5
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

cae_configure_dm_propertyset
This utility reads the NodeXMLConfig.xml file and configures the property set for data mapping.

The NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration XML file is used by the simulation administrator to control
which items, item revisions, forms, or BOM line attributes are processed. The administrator can edit the
required attributes in the XML file in such a way that Teamcenter processes only those needed
attributes. This significantly improves the performance and memory usage of data map and structure
map execution operations.

Property sets provide a nonprogrammatic way to control what is placed in the UserData element. The
UserData element is a container for a list of name-value pairs that allows any attribute or property that
is not in the PLM XML equivalent to be stored. Property sets are a way to get Teamcenter data into the
PLM XML file that may not be in the PLM XML schema and can be controlled by a programmer who does
not know Teamcenter code or how to write it. A property set is simply a list of property set clauses.

For more information about transfer modes, closure rules, and property sets, see PLM XML/TC XML
Export Import Administration.

SYNTAX

cae_configure_dm_propertyset
[-u=infodba]
[-p=infodba]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-log=log-file-name-containing-results-of-utility-execution]
[-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally infodba or another user with administration privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

4-6 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_configure_dm_propertyset

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g
Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-log
(Optional) Specify the name of the log file containing results of the utility execution.
-h
Displays help for this utility.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-7
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

cae_manage_datamap_definition
Updates the configured data map definition dataset using the specified datamapping.xml and the
NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration files.

SYNTAX

cae_manage_datamap_definition
-u=user-id
-p=password
-pf=password-file
-g=group
-ou=owning-user-id
-og=owning-group-name
-migrate=migrate-data-map-definition-files
-datamap_file_path=operating-system-path-to-data-mapping-file
-nodexml_file_path=operating-system-path-to-NodeXMLConfig-file
-revise=create-new-revision-of-configured-item
-configure_propertyset=configure-property-set-by-reading-NodeXMLConfig-file
-configure_propertyset_log=specify-path-to-log-file-generated-by-property-set-configuration

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally infodba or another user with administration privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g

4-8 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_manage_datamap_definition

Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-ou
(Optional) Specifies the ID of the owning user of the newly created objects.
-og
(Optional) Specifies the group associated with the owning user.

Note:
If used without a value, the default owning user’s group is used.

-migrate
(Optional) Specifies an option to migrate the data map definition files located in the TC_DATA
directory.
-datamap_file_path
(Optional) Specifies the operating system path to the data mapping file.

The file must exist at the specified location and the user must have access to the specified file. If the
file path has spaces, use double quotation marks to specify the path.
-nodexml_file_path
(Optional) Specifies the operating system path to the NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration file.

The file must exist at the specified location, and the user must have access to the specified file. If
the file path has spaces, use double quotation marks to specify the path.
-revise
(Optional) Creates a new revision of the configured item specified by the
CAE_datamap_files_location preference value and uses the newly created revision to create the
data mapping dataset and imports the files.
-configure_propertyset
(Optional) Configures the property set by reading the NodeXMLConfig.xml configuration file at the
configured location.
-configure_propertyset_log
(Optional) Specifies a path to the log file generated as a part of the property set configuration.

Note:
This option is ignored if used without the -configure_propertyset_log option.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-9
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

-h
Displays help for this utility.

ENVIRONMENT

Manually configure the Teamcenter environment..

FILES

As specified in log files produced by Teamcenter.

RESTRICTIONS

None.

4-10 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties

cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties
This utility migrates extended CAE properties.

SYNTAX

cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties
[-u=infodba]
[-p=infodba]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-attribute_mapping_file=attribute-mapping-file-name]
[-working_dir=migration-logs-directory-name][-batch_size=batch-size]
[-commit_size=commit-size]
[-dry_run=dry-run-and-not-commit-to-database][-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally infodba or another user with administration privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and to secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g
Specifies the group associated with the user.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-11
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-attribute_mapping_file
(Mandatory) Specifies the full path of the attribute mapping file to use for migration.
-working_dir
(Optional) Specifies the full path of the working directory for storing the migration logs.

If specified, all log files are created in that directory.

-batch_size
(Optional) The number of objects to update per batch or per tcxml file. The default size is 10000.

Example 1: If -batch_size=10 and the number of objects found by the query is 35, then 4 files are
created as follows:

• BulkAttrOut_1.xml (Objects 1-10)

• BulkAttrOut_2.xml (Objects 11-20)
• BulkAttrOut_3.xml (Objects 21-30)
• BulkAttrOut_4.xml (Objects 31-35)

Example 2: If -batch_size=50 and the number of queries objects is 42, then the command creates a
single file, BulkAttrOut_1.xml (Objects 1-42).
-commit_size
(Optional) The number of objects to update per island. The default size is 5000.

-commit_size should always be less than -batch_size.

-dry_run
(Optional) Specifies that the system does not commit the changes to the database.
-h
Displays help for this utility.

SAMPLE USAGE

• Migrate CAE properties (dry run):

cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties -u=username -p=password -g=dba -
attribute_mapping_file=attribute_mapping_file.txt -dry_run

• Migrate CAE properties (update):

cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties -u=username -p=password -g=dba -
attribute_mapping_file=attribute_mapping_file.txt

• Migrate CAE properties (update with a batch size of 500 and an island size of 200):

4-12 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties

cae_migrate_extended_cae_properties -u=username -p=password -g=dba -

attribute_mapping_file=attribute_mapping_file.txt -batch_size=500 -commit_size=200

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-13
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

cae_migrate_tool_configuration
Prior to Teamcenter 10.1.3, configured simulation tools were managed in the database in an XML file.
From 10.1.3, simulation tools are managed in the database as individual business objects, and,
therefore, you must migrate simulation tools when you to upgrade to Teamcenter 10.1.3 and beyond.

After Teamcenter is migrated to a new version, you must run the cae_migrate_tool_configuration
utility to migrate existing simulation tools.

This utility:

• Migrates the simulation tool configuration from the espf_configuration.xml file stored in the dataset
identified by the CAE_simulation_tool_config_dsname preference.

• Imports the simulation tool configuration structure from the PLM XML .xml file at the target site.

• Exports the simulation tool configuration structure to the PLM XML .xml file at the source site.

Note:
Non DBA users must use the -setRootToolByPass option for migration or import operations.

SYNTAX

cae_migrate_tool_configuration

[-u=dba_user]
[-p=password]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-ou=owning-user-id]
[-og=owning-group-name]
[-mode=export-or-import]
[-folder=folder-name]
[-fileName=PLM-XML-file]
[-lwofilename=ESPF-XML-file]
[-item_id=root-simulation-item-id]
[-rev=root-simulation-tool-item-rev-id]
[-rev_rule=revision-rule]
[-autorelease=auto-release-indicator]
[-setRootToolByPass=bypass-root-simulation-tool-setting]
[-h=displays-command-line-help]

ARGUMENTS

-u

4-14 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_migrate_tool_configuration

Specifies the user ID.

This is generally a user with DBA privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g
Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-ou
Specifies the owning user ID.

This user owns all created objects. This option is used only to migrate tool configuration from the
XML file stored in the dataset.
-og
Specifies the group associated with the owning user.

Note:
If you specify the -ou argument and do not specify the -og argument, the user’s default group
is used.

-mode=EXPORT | IMPORT

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-15
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

Specifies the mode of this utility. If this option is not used, this utility migrates the tool configuration
from the XML file stored in the dataset identified by the CAE_simulation_tool_config_dsname
preference.

- Exports the simulation tool structure in PLM XML format (.xml file) from the source
mode=EXPO site.
RT
- Imports the simulation tool structure in PLM XML format (.xml file) from the target
mode=IMPO site.
RT

-folder=folder-name
Specifies the folder where the PLM XML and ESPF XML files are created. Required only for PLM XML
mode of operation.
-fileName=PLM XML file

- Specifies the PLM XML (.xml) file that contains information about the Simulation
mode=EXPO Tool structure you want to export.
RT
- Specifies the PLM XML (.xml) file that contains information about the Simulation
mode=IMPO Tool structure you want to import.
RT

-lwofilename=ESPF-XML-file

- Specifies the PLM XML (.xml) file that contains information about the LWOs in the
mode=EXPO simulation tool structure you want to export.
RT
- Specifies the PLM XML (.xml) file contains information about the LWOs in the
mode=IMPO simulation tool structure that needs to be imported.
RT

-item_id=root-simulation-tool-item-id
Specify the item id of root simulation tool.
-rev=root-simulation-tool-item-rev-id
Specifies the item revision id of root simulation tool. This is required only for the PLM XML mode of
operation.
-rev_rule=revision-rule
Specifies the revision rule to configure the tool structure. If not specified, the default revision rule is
used. This is applicable for the PLM XML mode of operation.
-autorelease=auto-release-indicator
Releases the simulation tool structure after the import operation using the PLM XML mode of
operation.

4-16 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_migrate_tool_configuration

-setRootToolByPass
Bypasses the setting of the root simulation tool UID to the preference value to import or migrate
from the XML file.

Note:
If this option is not used, the utility sets the root simulation tool to the preference value.

-h
Displays help for this utility.

EXAMPLES

1. Migrate the simulation tool configuration (espf_configuration.xml) file to the simulation tool
structure and configure the simulation root tool.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=dba –ou=owning-user-id

2. Migrate the legacy tool configuration (espf_configuration.xml file) to the simulation tool
structure, but do not configure the simulation root tool.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=dba –ou=owning-user-id -

setRootToolByPass

3. Export the simulation tool configuration structure to the PLM XML (.xml) file using the default
revision rule.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=dba -mode=EXPORT -

folder=D:\Import-export\example_plmxml_folder -item_id=000082-rev=A

4. Export the simulation tool configuration structure to the PLM XML (.xml) file, using the Any
Status; Working revision rule.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=dba -mode=EXPORT -

folder=D:\Import-export\example_plmxml_folder -item_id=000082-rev=A -rev_rule=Any
Status; Working

5. Import the simulation tool configuration structure from the PLM XML (.xml) file, using the default
revision rule with the simulation administrator as the owning user, but do not configure the
simulation root tool.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=simulation administrator -

mode=IMPORT -folder=D:\Import-export\example_plmxml_folder -item_id=000082-rev=A –
ou=owning-user-id -setRootToolByPass

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-17
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

6. Import the simulation tool configuration structure from the PLM XML (.xml) file, using the default
revision rule, and release the structure after import, but do not configure the simulation root tool.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=DBA -mode=IMPORT -

folder=D:\Import-export\example_plmxml_folder -item_id=000082-rev=A –autorelease -
setRootToolByPass

7. Import the simulation tool configuration structure from the PLM XML (.xml) target site, release the
structure, and configure the simulation root tool.

cae_migrate_tool_configuration -u=dba_user -p=password -g=DBA -mode=IMPORT -

folder=D:\Import-export\example_plmxml_folder -item_id=000082-rev=A –autorelease

4-18 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_validate_structuremap

cae_validate_structuremap
Validates the CAE Structure Map item revision to ensure that the configured structure map rules are
properly validated before they are executed.

SYNTAX

cae_validate_structuremap
[-u=infodba
{-p=infodba
-pf=password-file}
-g=dba]
-ou=cae_admin
-og=simulation_administrator
-or=simulation_administrator
-SMItemKeyList=item-id=0001;item-id=0002;item-id=0003
-SMRevList =A;A;C
[-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally infodba or another user with administration privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-19
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

-g
Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-ou
(Optional) Specifies the owning user ID.

This user owns all created objects.

-og
(Optional) Specifies the group associated with the owning user.

Note:
If you specify the -ou argument and do not specify the -og argument, the user’s default group
is used.

-or
(Optional) Specifies the role associated with the owning user.
-SMItemKeyList
Specifies the list of structure map items key. At least one SMItemKey is required, for example, -
SMItemKey=item-id=value.

When using multiple item keys, use a semicolon separated string, for example,
SMItemKeyList=item1key;item2key;item3key.
-SMRevList
Specifies the list of structure map item revision IDs for corresponding item keys.

Note:
This list must have the same number of entries as the SMItemKeyList list.

When using multiple item keys, use a semicolon separated string, for example, SMRevList=item1-
revision-id;item2-revision2-id;item3-revision-id.
-h
Displays help for this utility.

EXAMPLES

To validate the structure map, enter the following command in a single line:

cae_validate_structuremap
-u=CAE_analyst

4-20 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_validate_structuremap

-p=*****
-g=CAE_designer
-ou=cae_admin
-og=simulation_administrator
-or=simulation_administrator
SMItemKeyList=item-id=0001;item-id=0002;item-id=0003
-SMRevList=A;A;C

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-21
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

cae_migrate_configurations
You can use this utility to export or import all types of CAE configurations, including analysis and model
dashboards, file upload rules, derivative rules, and derivative variant configurations.

Note:
Prior to the 11.5 release, the system used to store the configuration in a file. From the 11.5
release, the system stores the configuration in a CAE configuration object. Run this utility only if
you want to convert legacy CAE packages.

SYNTAX

cae_migrate_configurations
[-u=infodba]
[-p=infodba]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-config_type=the-type-of-configuration]
[-xml_file_path=the-path-to-the-xml-file]
[-scope=the-visibility-scope-of-the-configuration]
[-owning_user=the-owning-user]
[-owning_group=the-owning-group]
[-log=log-file-name-containing-results-of-utility-execution]
[-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally infodba or another user with administration privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf

4-22 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_migrate_configurations

Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g
Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-config_type
The configuration type. This argument is used only if -mode=export.

Examples:

• -config_type=AnalysisDashBoard for exporting the Analysis Dashboard configurations.

• -config_type=ModelDashBoard for exporting the Analysis Dashboard configurations.

• -config_type=CAEPackages for exporting the CAE package configurations.

• -config_type=DerivativeRules for exporting derivative rules.

• -config_type=DerivativeVariants for exporting derivative variant configurations.

• -config_type=FileUploadRules for exporting the file upload rules configurations.

• -config_type=All for exporting all configurations.

-mode
Specifies the migration mode of the configurations.

Valid values: export or import.

-xml_file_path
The path to the xml file containing the:

• Exported configuration if the -mode=export.

• Imported configuration if the -mode=import.

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-23
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

Note:
The user must have write access on the file to which the configuration is exported or
imported.

-scope
(Optional) The visibility scope of the configuration items you want to import. The valid values are
Site, Group, or User.
-owning_user
(Optional) Specifies the owning user for the imported items.

This option is used if the -mode=import. Otherwise, it is ignored. If you do not provide any mode,
the existing owning user is preserved.
-owning_group
Specifies the owning group of the user specified by the -owning_user mode.

Note:
You must specify this option if you use the -owning_user mode.

-log
(Optional) Specify the name of the log file containing the details of the PLM XML import or export.
-status
Specifies the status to apply on the configuration after importing.

This argument is used only if -mode=import.

The valid values are Approved, Obsolete, Pending, PlanningSyncDate, Rejected, TC Baselined,
TCM Released, Validation, or any other value defined in BMIDE through the Extensions →
Template_Name → Options → Status menu command.
-h
Displays help for this utility.

SAMPLE USAGE FOR EXPORTING

1. Export analysis dashboard configurations at all (site, group, user) levels:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -
config_type=AnalysisDashboard -mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

2. Export file upload rules configurations at all (site, group, user) levels:

4-24 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_migrate_configurations

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -config_type=FileUploadRules

-mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

3. Export derivative rule configurations at all (site, group, user) levels:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -config_type=DerivativeRules -
mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

4. Export derivative variant configurations at all (site, group, user) levels:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -
config_type=DerivativeVariants -mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

5. Export model dashboard configurations at all (site, group, user) levels:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -
config_type=ModelDashboard -mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

6. Export CAE package configurations at all (site, group, user) levels:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -config_type=CAEPackages -
mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

7. Export all configurations at all (site, group, user) scope levels:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -mode=export -
xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

8. Export all configurations at site level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -mode=export -scope=Site -
xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

9. Export all configurations at user level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -mode=export -scope=User -
xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

10. Export all dashboard configurations at site level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -
config_type=AnalysisDashboard -mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

11. Export all file upload rule set configurations at site level:
cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -config_type=FileUploadRules
-mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

12. Export all derivative rule configurations at site level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -config_type=DerivativeRules -
mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

13. Export all derivative variant configurations at site level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -
config_type=DerivativeVariants -mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-25
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

14. Export all model dashboard configurations at site level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -
config_type=ModelDashboard -mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

15. Export all CAE package configurations at site level:

cae_migrate_configurations -u=username -p=password -g=group -config_type=CAEPackages -
mode=export -xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

SAMPLE USAGE FOR IMPORTING

1. Import all the configurations and preserve the owning user, owning group, scope information
given in the XML file in the target database. This is assuming that the information exists in the
target database.
If the user does not exist, the ownership is transferred to the importing user, that is, tcadmin in
this example.
cae_migrate_configurations -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=dba -mode=import -
xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

2. Import all the configurations and change the owning user and owning group to engineering user
and scope to the user in the target database.
cae_migrate_configurations -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=group -mode=import -scope=User -
owning_user=EngUser -owning_group=Engineering -xml_file_path=D:\workdir
\migrate_export.xml

3. Import all the configurations and apply the Approved status.

cae_migrate_configurations -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=group -mode=import -status=Approved
-xml_file_path=D:\workdir\migrate_export.xml

4-26 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
 cae_add_report_templates

cae_add_report_templates
This utility imports the Microsoft Excel templates for the simulation dashboard.

SYNTAX

cae_add_report_templates
[-u=infodba]
[-p=infodba]
[-pf=password-file]
[-g=dba]
[-f=path-of-the-folder-from-which-you-want-to-import-templates]
[-i=template-file-path-you-want-to-import]
[-t=template-type]
[-update=using-the-update-option]
[-h]

ARGUMENTS

-u
Specifies the user ID.

This is generally infodba or another user with administration privileges.

Note:
If Security Services single sign-on (SSO) is enabled for your server, the -u and -p arguments
are authenticated externally through SSO rather than being authenticated against the
Teamcenter database. If you do not supply these arguments, the utility attempts to join an
existing SSO session. If no session is found, you are prompted to enter a user ID and password.

-p
Specifies the password.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -pf argument.

-pf
Specifies the password file.

The -pf argument provides enhanced password security by allowing you to place a password
(encrypted or unencrypted) in a text file and secure the file using operating system-level security.

This argument is mutually exclusive with the -p argument.

-g

Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0 PLM00215 13.0 4-27
© 2020 Siemens
 4. Running CAE utilities

Specifies the group associated with the user.

If used without a value, the user's default group is assumed.

-f
Specify the folder path of from which you want to import the templates.
-i
Specify the template file you want to import.
-t
The type of template you want to import. Mandatory if you use -i or -f options.

Supported type: [ExcelTemplate]

-update
The system revises the CAE template and imports the new template file with the update option.
-h
Displays help for this utility.

SAMPLE USAGE

Using the utility without providing any arguments:

If you do not provide any arguments, the utility imports the default template in the TC_DATA directory.

cae_add_report_templates -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=dba

Using the template file path:

cae_add_report_templates -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=dba -t=ExcelTemplate -i=D:\workdir\-

CAE_default_Simulation_Dashboard_template.xlsm

Using the folder path:

cae_add_report_templates -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=dba -t=ExcelTemplate -f=D:\workdir

\ExcelTemplateFolder

Using the update option:

cae_add_report_templates -u=tcadmin -p=tcadmin -g=dba -t=ExcelTemplate -i=D:\workdir\-

CAE_default_Simulation_Dashboard_template.xlsm –update

4-28 PLM00215 13.0 Installing and Configuring Simulation Process Management, Teamcenter 13.0
© 2020 Siemens
Siemens Digital Industries Software
Headquarters Europe
Granite Park One Stephenson House
5800 Granite Parkway Sir William Siemens Square
Suite 600 Frimley, Camberley
Plano, TX 75024 Surrey, GU16 8QD
USA +44 (0) 1276 413200
+1 972 987 3000

Asia-Pacific
Americas Suites 4301-4302, 43/F
Granite Park One AIA Kowloon Tower, Landmark East
5800 Granite Parkway 100 How Ming Street
Suite 600 Kwun Tong, Kowloon
Plano, TX 75024 Hong Kong
USA +852 2230 3308
+1 314 264 8499

About Siemens Digital Industries Software

Siemens Digital Industries Software is a leading global provider of product life cycle management
(PLM) software and services with 7 million licensed seats and 71,000 customers worldwide.
Headquartered in Plano, Texas, Siemens Digital Industries Software works collaboratively with
companies to deliver open solutions that help them turn more ideas into successful products. For
more information on Siemens Digital Industries Software products and services, visit
www.siemens.com/plm.
This software and related documentation are proprietary and confidential to Siemens.
© 2020 Siemens. A list of relevant Siemens trademarks is available. Other trademarks belong to
their respective owners.